Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide (p/n 72E 69834 04 Rev A) Manual

User Manual: symbol-ls4278-manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 414 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Symbol LS4278
Product Reference Guide
Symbol LS4278
Product Reference Guide
72E-69834-04
Revision A
October 2008
ii Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
© 2008 by Motorola, Inc. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or used in any form, or by any electrical or mechanical means,
without permission in writing from Motorola. This includes electronic or mechanical means, such as
photocopying, recording, or information storage and retrieval systems. The material in this manual is subject to
change without notice.
The software is provided strictly on an “as is” basis. All software, including firmware, furnished to the user is on
a licensed basis. Motorola grants to the user a non-transferable and non-exclusive license to use each
software or firmware program delivered hereunder (licensed program). Except as noted below, such license
may not be assigned, sublicensed, or otherwise transferred by the user without prior written consent of
Motorola. No right to copy a licensed program in whole or in part is granted, except as permitted under
copyright law. The user shall not modify, merge, or incorporate any form or portion of a licensed program with
other program material, create a derivative work from a licensed program, or use a licensed program in a
network without written permission from Motorola. The user agrees to maintain Motorola’s copyright notice on
the licensed programs delivered hereunder, and to include the same on any authorized copies it makes, in
whole or in part. The user agrees not to decompile, disassemble, decode, or reverse engineer any licensed
program delivered to the user or any portion thereof.
Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any software or product to improve reliability, function, or
design.
Motorola does not assume any product liability arising out of, or in connection with, the application or use of
any product, circuit, or application described herein.
No license is granted, either expressly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise under any Motorola, Inc.,
intellectual property rights. An implied license only exists for equipment, circuits, and subsystems contained in
Motorola products.
MOTOROLA and the Stylized M Logo and Symbol and the Symbol logo are registered in the US Patent &
Trademark Office. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Microsoft, Windows and ActiveSync
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All other product or service names
are the property of their respective owners.
Motorola, Inc.
One Motorola Plaza
Holtsville, New York 11742-1300
http://www.motorola.com/enterprisemobility
Patents
This product is covered by one or more of the patents listed on the website:
http://www.motorola.com/enterprisemobility/patents.
Warranty
For the complete Motorola hardware product warranty statement, go to:
http://www.motorola.com/enterprisemobility/warranty.
iii
Revision History
Changes to the original manual are listed below:
Change Date Description
-01 Rev A 11/2005 Initial release.
-02 Rev A 3/2006 Updated guide for the following enhancements: battery reconditioning, beep on
insertion, intellistand idle timeout interval, reconnect attempt interval, out of range
indicator, battery information. Added ADF chapter.
-03 Rev A 2/2007 Updated service information, added notes that Multipoint-to-Point mode doesn’t
support the Beep on <BEL> feature.
-04 Rev A 10/2008 Removed HID Profile (Master) option, updated auto-reconnect options, updated
Pairing Mode information, added the following new parameters: Discoverable
Mode, new UPC/EAN Supplemental options, User-Programmable Supplementals,
Bookland ISBN format.
iv Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Table of Contents
About This Guide
Introduction.................................................................................................................... xiii
Chapter Descriptions ..................................................................................................... xiii
Notational Conventions.................................................................................................. xiv
Related Documents ....................................................................................................... xv
Service Information........................................................................................................ xv
Chapter 1: Getting Started
Introduction ................................................................................................................... 1-1
Unpacking the Scanner and Cradle .............................................................................. 1-2
Parts ............................................................................................................................. 1-3
Scanner ................................................................................................................... 1-3
Cradle ..................................................................................................................... 1-4
Scanner Cradle ............................................................................................................. 1-6
Connecting the Cradle ............................................................................................ 1-6
Supplying Power to the Cradle ............................................................................... 1-7
Connecting a Synapse Cable Interface .................................................................. 1-7
Lost Connection to Host .......................................................................................... 1-8
Mounting the Cradle ................................................................................................ 1-8
Replacing the Scanner Battery ..................................................................................... 1-9
Charging the Scanner Battery ...................................................................................... 1-10
Charging LED ......................................................................................................... 1-10
Reconditioning the Scanner Battery ............................................................................. 1-10
Battery Reconditioning LED Definitions .................................................................. 1-11
Inserting the Scanner in the Cradle .............................................................................. 1-11
Horizontal Cradle Mount ......................................................................................... 1-11
Vertical Cradle Mount ............................................................................................. 1-11
Radio Communications ................................................................................................. 1-12
Configuring the Scanner ............................................................................................... 1-12
Accessories .................................................................................................................. 1-13
Lanyard ................................................................................................................... 1-13
vi Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Chapter 2: Scanning
Introduction ................................................................................................................... 2-1
Beeper Definitions ........................................................................................................ 2-1
LED Definitions ............................................................................................................. 2-3
Scanning in Hand-Held Mode ....................................................................................... 2-4
Aiming ..................................................................................................................... 2-4
Scanning in Hands-Free Mode ..................................................................................... 2-6
Assemble the Stand ................................................................................................ 2-6
Scanning with Intellistand ....................................................................................... 2-7
Decode Zone ................................................................................................................ 2-9
Chapter 3: Maintenance, Troubleshooting & Technical Specifications
Introduction ................................................................................................................... 3-1
Maintenance ................................................................................................................. 3-1
Scanner ................................................................................................................... 3-1
Cradle ..................................................................................................................... 3-1
Battery Information ....................................................................................................... 3-2
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 3-2
Technical Specifications ............................................................................................... 3-7
Cradle Signal Descriptions ........................................................................................... 3-10
Chapter 4: Radio Communications
Introduction ................................................................................................................... 4-1
Scanning Sequence Examples ............................................................................... 4-1
Errors While Scanning ............................................................................................ 4-1
Radio Communications Parameter Defaults ................................................................. 4-2
Wireless Beeper Definitions .......................................................................................... 4-3
Radio Communications Host Types ............................................................................. 4-4
Bluetooth Technology Profile Support .......................................................................... 4-6
Master/Slave Set Up ............................................................................................... 4-6
Bluetooth Friendly Name ........................................................................................ 4-7
Discoverable Mode ................................................................................................. 4-7
HID Host Parameters .................................................................................................... 4-8
HID Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) ...................................................... 4-8
HID Keyboard Keystroke Delay .............................................................................. 4-10
HID CAPS Lock Override ........................................................................................ 4-10
HID Ignore Unknown Characters ............................................................................ 4-11
Emulate Keypad ...................................................................................................... 4-11
HID Keyboard FN1 Substitution .............................................................................. 4-12
HID Function Key Mapping ..................................................................................... 4-12
Simulated Caps Lock .............................................................................................. 4-13
Convert Case .......................................................................................................... 4-13
Auto-reconnect Feature ................................................................................................ 4-14
Reconnect Attempt Beep Feedback ....................................................................... 4-14
Reconnect Attempt Interval ..................................................................................... 4-15
Auto-reconnect in Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation (HID Slave) Mode ..................... 4-17
Out of Range Indicator .................................................................................................. 4-17
Scanner(s) To Cradle Support ...................................................................................... 4-18
Table of Contents vii
Modes of Operation ................................................................................................ 4-18
Parameter Broadcast (Cradle Host Only) ............................................................... 4-19
Pairing ..................................................................................................................... 4-19
Pairing Bar Code Format ........................................................................................ 4-22
Connection Maintenance Interval ........................................................................... 4-23
Bluetooth Security ......................................................................................................... 4-25
Authentication ......................................................................................................... 4-25
PIN Code ................................................................................................................ 4-26
Encryption ............................................................................................................... 4-27
Chapter 5: User Preferences
Introduction ................................................................................................................... 5-1
Scanning Sequence Examples ............................................................................... 5-1
Errors While Scanning ............................................................................................ 5-1
User Preferences Parameter Defaults .......................................................................... 5-2
User Preferences .......................................................................................................... 5-3
Default Parameters ................................................................................................. 5-3
Beeper Tone ........................................................................................................... 5-4
Beeper Volume ....................................................................................................... 5-4
Beep on Insertion .................................................................................................... 5-5
Intellistand Idle Timeout .......................................................................................... 5-5
Power Mode ............................................................................................................ 5-7
Time Delay to Reduced Power Mode ..................................................................... 5-8
Scan Pattern ........................................................................................................... 5-9
Scan Line Width ...................................................................................................... 5-10
Laser On Time ........................................................................................................ 5-10
Beep After Good Decode ........................................................................................ 5-10
Transmit Code ID Character ................................................................................... 5-12
Prefix/Suffix Values ................................................................................................. 5-13
Scan Data Transmission Format ............................................................................ 5-13
FN1 Substitution Values ......................................................................................... 5-15
Transmit “No Read” Message ................................................................................. 5-15
Synapse Interface ................................................................................................... 5-16
Batch Mode ............................................................................................................. 5-17
Chapter 6: Keyboard Wedge Interface
Introduction ................................................................................................................... 6-1
Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface ..................................................................... 6-2
Keyboard Wedge Parameter Defaults .......................................................................... 6-3
Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters .............................................................................. 6-4
Keyboard Wedge Host Types ................................................................................. 6-4
Keyboard Wedge Country Types (Country Codes) ................................................ 6-5
Ignore Unknown Characters ................................................................................... 6-6
Keystroke Delay ...................................................................................................... 6-7
Intra-Keystroke Delay ............................................................................................. 6-7
Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation ..................................................................... 6-8
Caps Lock On ......................................................................................................... 6-8
Caps Lock Override ................................................................................................ 6-9
viii Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Convert Wedge Data .............................................................................................. 6-9
Function Key Mapping ............................................................................................ 6-10
FN1 Substitution ..................................................................................................... 6-10
Send Make and Break ............................................................................................ 6-11
Keyboard Maps ............................................................................................................. 6-12
ASCII Character Set for Keyboard Wedge ................................................................... 6-13
Chapter 7: RS-232 Interface
Introduction ................................................................................................................... 7-1
Connecting an RS-232 Interface .................................................................................. 7-2
RS-232 Parameter Defaults .......................................................................................... 7-3
RS-232 Host Parameters .............................................................................................. 7-4
RS-232 Host Types ................................................................................................. 7-6
Baud Rate ............................................................................................................... 7-7
Parity ....................................................................................................................... 7-8
Stop Bit Select ........................................................................................................ 7-9
Data Bits (ASCII Format) ........................................................................................ 7-9
Check Receive Errors ............................................................................................. 7-10
Hardware Handshaking .......................................................................................... 7-10
Software Handshaking ............................................................................................ 7-12
Host Serial Response Time-out .............................................................................. 7-14
RTS Line State ........................................................................................................ 7-15
Beep on <BEL> ....................................................................................................... 7-15
Intercharacter Delay ................................................................................................ 7-16
Nixdorf Beep/LED Options ...................................................................................... 7-17
Ignore Unknown Characters ................................................................................... 7-17
ASCII Character Set for RS-232 ................................................................................... 7-18
Chapter 8: USB Interface
Introduction ................................................................................................................... 8-1
Connecting a USB Interface ......................................................................................... 8-2
USB Parameter Defaults .............................................................................................. 8-3
USB Host Parameters .................................................................................................. 8-4
USB Device Type .................................................................................................... 8-4
USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) .................................................... 8-5
USB Keystroke Delay ............................................................................................. 8-7
USB CAPS Lock Override ...................................................................................... 8-7
USB Ignore Unknown Characters ........................................................................... 8-8
Emulate Keypad ...................................................................................................... 8-8
USB Keyboard FN 1 Substitution ............................................................................ 8-9
Function Key Mapping ............................................................................................ 8-9
Simulated Caps Lock .............................................................................................. 8-10
Convert Case .......................................................................................................... 8-10
Optional USB Parameters ............................................................................................ 8-11
Ignore Beep ............................................................................................................ 8-11
Ignore Bar Code Configuration ............................................................................... 8-11
ASCII Character Set for USB ........................................................................................ 8-12
Table of Contents ix
Chapter 9: IBM Interface
Introduction ................................................................................................................... 9-1
Connecting to an IBM 468X/469X Host ........................................................................ 9-2
IBM Parameter Defaults ............................................................................................... 9-3
IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters ................................................................................. 9-4
Port Address ........................................................................................................... 9-4
Convert Unknown to Code 39 ................................................................................. 9-5
Optional IBM Parameters ............................................................................................. 9-5
Ignore Beep ............................................................................................................ 9-5
Ignore Bar Code Configuration ............................................................................... 9-6
Chapter 10: Wand Emulation Interface
Introduction ................................................................................................................... 10-1
Connecting Using Wand Emulation .............................................................................. 10-2
Wand Emulation Parameter Defaults ........................................................................... 10-3
Wand Emulation Host Parameters ............................................................................... 10-4
Wand Emulation Host Types .................................................................................. 10-4
Leading Margin (Quiet Zone) .................................................................................. 10-5
Polarity .................................................................................................................... 10-6
Ignore Unknown Characters ................................................................................... 10-6
Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 .......................................................................... 10-7
Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII ............................................................................... 10-8
Chapter 11: Scanner Emulation Interface
Introduction ................................................................................................................... 11-1
Connecting Using Scanner Emulation .......................................................................... 11-2
Scanner Emulation Parameter Defaults ....................................................................... 11-3
Scanner Emulation Host ............................................................................................... 11-3
Scanner Emulation Host Parameters ........................................................................... 11-4
Beep Style ............................................................................................................... 11-4
Parameter Pass-Through ........................................................................................ 11-5
Convert Newer Code Types .................................................................................... 11-6
Module Width .......................................................................................................... 11-6
Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 .......................................................................... 11-7
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion .............................................................................. 11-7
Transmission Timeout ............................................................................................. 11-8
Ignore Unknown Characters ................................................................................... 11-9
Leading Margin ....................................................................................................... 11-9
Check For Decode LED .......................................................................................... 11-10
Chapter 12: 123Scan
Introduction ................................................................................................................... 12-1
Communication with 123Scan ...................................................................................... 12-1
123Scan requirements: ................................................................................................. 12-1
123Scan Parameter ...................................................................................................... 12-2
x Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Chapter 13: Symbologies
Introduction ................................................................................................................... 13-1
Scanning Sequence Examples ............................................................................... 13-1
Errors While Scanning ............................................................................................ 13-1
Symbology Parameter Defaults .................................................................................... 13-2
UPC/EAN ...................................................................................................................... 13-5
Enable/Disable UPC-A/UPC-E ............................................................................... 13-5
Enable/Disable UPC-E1 .......................................................................................... 13-6
Enable/Disable EAN-13/EAN-8 ............................................................................... 13-6
Enable/Disable Bookland EAN ............................................................................... 13-8
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals .................................................................. 13-9
User-Programmable Supplementals ....................................................................... 13-12
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy ............................................................ 13-12
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit .................................................................................. 13-13
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit .................................................................................. 13-13
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit ................................................................................ 13-14
UPC-A Preamble .................................................................................................... 13-14
UPC-E Preamble .................................................................................................... 13-15
UPC-E1 Preamble .................................................................................................. 13-16
Convert UPC-E to UPC-A ....................................................................................... 13-17
Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A ..................................................................................... 13-17
EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend .............................................................................................. 13-18
Bookland ISBN Format ........................................................................................... 13-19
UCC Coupon Extended Code ................................................................................. 13-20
Code 128 ...................................................................................................................... 13-21
Enable/Disable Code 128 ....................................................................................... 13-21
Enable/Disable GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128) ................................................ 13-21
Enable/Disable ISBT 128 ........................................................................................ 13-22
Code 39 ........................................................................................................................ 13-23
Enable/Disable Code 39 ......................................................................................... 13-23
Enable/Disable Trioptic Code 39 ............................................................................ 13-23
Convert Code 39 to Code 32 .................................................................................. 13-24
Code 32 Prefix ........................................................................................................ 13-24
Set Lengths for Code 39 ......................................................................................... 13-25
Code 39 Check Digit Verification ............................................................................ 13-26
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit ................................................................................ 13-26
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion .............................................................................. 13-27
Code 39 Buffering (Scan & Store) .......................................................................... 13-27
Code 93 ........................................................................................................................ 13-30
Enable/Disable Code 93 ......................................................................................... 13-30
Set Lengths for Code 93 ......................................................................................... 13-30
Code 11 ........................................................................................................................ 13-32
Code 11 .................................................................................................................. 13-32
Set Lengths for Code 11 ......................................................................................... 13-32
Code 11 Check Digit Verification ............................................................................ 13-34
Transmit Code 11 Check Digits .............................................................................. 13-34
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) ................................................................................................. 13-35
Enable/Disable Interleaved 2 of 5 ........................................................................... 13-35
Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 ........................................................................... 13-35
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification ............................................................................... 13-37
Table of Contents xi
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit ................................................................................... 13-37
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 ...................................................................................... 13-38
Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF) .................................................................................................... 13-39
Enable/Disable Discrete 2 of 5 ................................................................................ 13-39
Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 ............................................................................... 13-39
Chinese 2 of 5 ............................................................................................................... 13-41
Enable/Disable Chinese 2 of 5 ................................................................................ 13-41
Codabar (NW - 7) ......................................................................................................... 13-42
Enable/Disable Codabar ......................................................................................... 13-42
Set Lengths for Codabar ......................................................................................... 13-42
CLSI Editing ............................................................................................................ 13-44
NOTIS Editing ......................................................................................................... 13-44
MSI ............................................................................................................................... 13-45
Enable/Disable MSI ................................................................................................ 13-45
Set Lengths for MSI ................................................................................................ 13-45
MSI Check Digits .................................................................................................... 13-46
Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) ................................................................................... 13-47
MSI Check Digit Algorithm ...................................................................................... 13-47
GS1 DataBar ................................................................................................................ 13-48
Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN ........................................................................ 13-49
Symbology - Specific Security Levels ........................................................................... 13-50
Redundancy Level .................................................................................................. 13-50
Security Level ......................................................................................................... 13-52
Symbology - Intercharacter Gap ................................................................................... 13-53
Chapter 14: Advanced Data Formatting
Introduction ................................................................................................................... 14-1
Rules: Criteria Linked to Actions ................................................................................... 14-1
Using ADF Bar Codes .................................................................................................. 14-2
ADF Bar Code Menu Example ..................................................................................... 14-2
Rule 1: The Code 128 Scanning Rule .................................................................... 14-3
Rule 2: The UPC Scanning Rule ............................................................................ 14-3
Alternate Rule Sets ................................................................................................. 14-3
Rules Hierarchy (in Bar Codes) .............................................................................. 14-4
Default Rules .......................................................................................................... 14-5
ADF Bar Codes ............................................................................................................. 14-6
Special Commands ....................................................................................................... 14-8
Pause Duration ....................................................................................................... 14-8
Begin New Rule ...................................................................................................... 14-8
Save Rule ............................................................................................................... 14-8
Erase ....................................................................................................................... 14-9
Quit Entering Rules ................................................................................................. 14-9
Disable Rule Set ..................................................................................................... 14-10
Criteria .......................................................................................................................... 14-11
Code Types ............................................................................................................. 14-11
Code Lengths .......................................................................................................... 14-15
Message Containing A Specific Data String ........................................................... 14-19
Actions .......................................................................................................................... 14-24
Send Data ............................................................................................................... 14-24
xii Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Setup Field(s) .......................................................................................................... 14-27
Modify Data ............................................................................................................. 14-32
Pad Data with Spaces ............................................................................................. 14-34
Pad Data with Zeros ............................................................................................... 14-38
Beeps ...................................................................................................................... 14-43
Send Keystroke (Control Characters and Keyboard Characters) ........................... 14-43
Send Right Control Key .......................................................................................... 14-79
Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters ...................................................... 14-80
Turn On/Off Rule Sets ............................................................................................ 14-85
Alphanumeric Keyboard ............................................................................................... 14-87
Appendix A: Standard Default Parameters
Appendix B: Programming Reference
Symbol Code Identifiers ................................................................................................ B-1
AIM Code Identifiers ..................................................................................................... B-2
Appendix C: Sample Bar Codes
Code 39 ........................................................................................................................ C-1
UPC/EAN ...................................................................................................................... C-2
UPC-A, 100% .......................................................................................................... C-2
EAN-13, 100% ........................................................................................................ C-2
Code 128 ...................................................................................................................... C-2
Interleaved 2 of 5 .......................................................................................................... C-3
GS1 DataBar ................................................................................................................ C-3
GS1 DataBar-14 ..................................................................................................... C-4
Appendix D: Numeric Bar Codes
Cancel ........................................................................................................................... D-3
Appendix E: Alphanumeric Bar Codes
Alphanumeric Keyboard ............................................................................................... E-1
Appendix F: ASCII Character Sets
Index
Tell Us What You Think...
About This Guide
Introduction
The Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide provides general instructions for setting up, operating, maintaining,
and troubleshooting the Symbol LS4278 scanner and cradles.
Chapter Descriptions
Topics covered in this guide are as follows:
•
Chapter 1, Getting Started provides a product overview, unpacking instructions, and cable connection
information.
•
Chapter 2, Scanning describes parts of the scanner, beeper and LED definitions, and how to use the scanner
in hand-held and hands-free modes.
•
Chapter 3, Maintenance, Troubleshooting & Technical Specifications provides information on how to care for
the scanner and cradle, troubleshooting, and technical specifications.
•
Chapter 4, Radio Communications provides information about the modes of operation and features available
for wireless communication. This chapter also includes programming bar codes to configure the scanner.
•
Chapter 5, User Preferences provides programming bar codes for selecting user preference features for the
scanner and commonly used bar codes to customize how the data is transmitted to the host device.
•
Chapter 6, Keyboard Wedge Interface provides information for setting up the scanner and cradle for
Keyboard Wedge operation.
•
Chapter 7, RS-232 Interface provides information for setting up the scanner and cradle for RS-232 operation.
•
Chapter 8, USB Interface provides information for setting up the scanner and cradle for USB operation.
•
Chapter 9, IBM Interfaceprovides all information for setting up the scanner and cradle with IBM 468X/469X
POS systems.
•
Chapter 10, Wand Emulation Interface provides all information for setting up the scanner and cradle for
Wand Emulation operation.
•
Chapter 11, Scanner Emulation Interface provides information for setting up the scanner and cradle for
Scanner Emulation operation.
xvi Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
•
Chapter 12, 123Scan (PC based scanner configuration tool) provides the bar code that must be scanned to
communicate with the 123Scan program.
•
Chapter 13, Symbologies describes all symbology features and provides the programming bar codes
necessary for selecting these features for the scanner.
•
Chapter 14, Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) describes how to customize scanned data before transmitting
to the host. This chapter also contains the bar codes for advanced data formatting.
•
Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters provides a table of all host devices and miscellaneous scanner
defaults.
•
Appendix B, Programming Reference provides a table of AIM code identifiers, ASCII character conversions,
and keyboard maps.
•
Appendix C, Sample Bar Codes includes sample bar codes.
•
Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes includes the numeric bar codes to scan for parameters requiring specific
numeric values.
•
Appendix E, Alphanumeric Bar Codes includes the bar codes representing the alphanumeric keyboard, used
when setting ADF rules.
•
Appendix F, ASCII Character Sets provides ASCII character value tables.
Notational Conventions
The following conventions are used in this document:
•
Italics are used to highlight chapters and sections in this and related documents.
•
Bold text is used to highlight parameter names and options.
•
bullets (•) indicate:
•Action items
•Lists of alternatives
•Lists of required steps that are not necessarily sequential
•
Sequential lists (e.g., those that describe step-by-step procedures) appear as numbered lists.
•
Throughout the programming bar code menus, asterisks (*) are used to denote default parameter settings.
*Baud Rate 9600 Feature/Option
* Indicates Default
NOTE This symbol indicates something of special interest or importance to the reader. Failure to read the note
will not result in physical harm to the reader, equipment or data.
About This Guidexvii
Related Documents
•
The Symbol LS4278 Quick Reference Guide (p/n 72-69835-xx) provides general information to help the user
get started with the scanner. It includes basic operation instructions and start up bar codes.
•
The STB4208/4278 Cradle Quick Reference Guide (p/n 72-71010-xx) provides information to help the user
set up and use the charge only and host interface cradles. It includes set up and mounting instructions.
For the latest version of this guide and all guides, go to: http://www.motorola.com/enterprisemobility/manuals.
Service Information
If you have a problem with your equipment, contact Motorola Enterprise Mobility Support for your region. Contact
information is available at: http://www.motorola.com/enterprisemobility/contactsupport.
When contacting Enterprise Mobility Support, please have the following information available:
•
Serial number of the unit
•
Model number or product name
•
Software type and version number.
Motorola responds to calls by E-mail, telephone or fax within the time limits set forth in support agreements.
If your problem cannot be solved by Motorola Enterprise Mobility Support, you may need to return your equipment
for servicing and will be given specific directions. Motorola is not responsible for any damages incurred during
shipment if the approved shipping container is not used. Shipping the units improperly can possibly void the
warranty.
If you purchased your Enterprise Mobility business product from a Motorola business partner, contact that business
partner for support.
CAUTION This symbol indicates that if this information is ignored, the possibility of data or material damage may
occur.
WARNING!This symbol indicates that if this information is ignored the possibility that serious personal
injury may occur.
xviii Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Introduction
The Symbol LS4278 combines excellent scanning performance and advanced ergonomics to provide the best
value in a lightweight laser scanner. Whether used as a hand-held scanner or in hands-free mode in a stand, the
scanner ensures comfort and ease of use for extended periods of time.
Figure 1-1
Symbol LS4278 Scanner
1 - 2 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
In addition to single-line laser scanning, the scanner supports multi-line rastering. Multi-line rastering allows the
scanner to capture stacked GS1 DataBar codes and increases angular tolerances, minimizing product orientation
and hand movements. Multi-line rastering also allows the scanner to read poor quality bar codes. For more
information about scanning modes and stacked GS1 DataBar codes, see Scan Pattern on page 5-9 and GS1
DataBar on page C-3.
This STB4278 cradle supports the following interfaces:
•
Keyboard Wedge connection to a host. The host interprets scanned data as keystrokes. This interface
supports the following international keyboards (for Windows® environment): North America, German,
French, French Canadian, Spanish, Italian, Swedish, UK English, Portuguese-Brazilian, and Japanese.
•
Standard RS-232 connection to a host. Scan bar code menus to set up proper communication of the cradle
with the host.
•
USB connection to a host. The cradle autodetects a USB host and defaults to the HID keyboard interface
type. Select other USB interface types by scanning programming bar code menus.This interface supports the
following international keyboards (for Windows® environment): North America, German, French, French
Canadian, Spanish, Italian, Swedish, UK English, Portuguese-Brazilian, and Japanese.
•
Connection to IBM® 468X/469X hosts. Scan bar code menus to set up communication of the cradle with the
IBM terminal.
•
Wand Emulation connection to a host. The cradle is connected to a portable data terminal, a controller, or
host which collects the data as wand data and decodes it.
•
Scanner Emulation connection to a host. The cradle is connected to a portable data terminal, a controller
which collects the data and interprets it for the host.
•
Synapse capability which allows connection to a wide variety of host systems using a Synapse and Synapse
adapter cable. The cradle autodetects the host.
•
Configuration via 123Scan.
Unpacking the Scanner and Cradle
Remove the scanner and cradle from their respective packing and inspect for damage. If the scanner or cradle was
damaged in transit, contact Motorola Enterprise Mobility Support. See page xvii for contact information. KEEP THE
PACKING. It is the approved shipping container and should be used if the equipment ever needs to be returned for
servicing.
NOTE The scanner does not currently support PDF417 bar codes and its variants.
Getting Started 1 - 3
Parts
Scanner
s
Figure 1-2
Parts of the Scanner
Beeper
LED
Trigger
Scan
Window
Battery Door
Latch
Metal Charging
Contacts
1 - 4 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Cradle
Figure 1-3
Cradle Front View
Pairing
Bar Code
Latch Latch
Charging/
Communications
Contacts
Charging LED
Getting Started 1 - 5
Figure 1-4
Cradle Back View
Rubber Foot Rubber Foot
Mounting Hole
Host Cable Groove
Rubber Foot Rubber Foot
Power Port
Host Port
Power Cable Groove
Desk/Wall Mount
Converter Knob
Mounting Hole
Power Cable Hook Host Cable Hook
1 - 6 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Scanner Cradle
The scanner cradle serves as a stand, charger, and host interface for the scanner. The cradle sits on a desktop or
mounts on a vertical surface (such as a wall). For more information about mounting options and procedures, refer
to the documentation included with the cradle.
There are two versions of the cradle:
•
Charging cradle with radio: When the cordless scanner is paired to the cradle, all communication between
the scanner and the host computer is accomplished through the cradle. Each bar code contains
programming instructions or other data unique to the bar code pattern. The scanner is paired to the cradle
and transmits bar code data to the cradle via Bluetooth Technology Profile Support. The cradle then sends
that information via an interface cable to the host computer for interpretation.
•
Charge-only cradle: This cradle serves as a stand and battery charger. It does not contain a radio and has
no communication capability.
Connecting the Cradle
Important: Connect the interface cable and power supply (if necessary) in the following order to ensure proper
operation of the scanner and cradle:
1. If a power supply is connected to the cradle, disconnect it. See Figure 1-5.
2. If using an interface cable, insert the cable into the cradle’s host port.
3. If using a power supply that connects to the interface cable, insert this power supply into the power connector
on the interface cable, and the other end to an AC supply.
4. Insert the other end of the interface cable into the appropriate port on the host computer (see the specific host
chapter for information on host connections).
5. If using an external power supply (if required by the interface, or to allow fast charging of the scanner), insert
the power cable into the power port on the back of the cradle, and connect the power supply to an approved
AC supply (see the STB4208/4278 Cradle Quick Reference Guide for more information).
Figure 1-5
Connecting the Cables to the Cradle
NOTE For more information about communication between the scanner, cradle and host, see Chapter 4, Radio
Communications.
Power Port Host Port
Getting Started 1 - 7
6. If applicable, thread the interface cable over the cable support hook and run the host and power cables into
their respective cable grooves.
7. Mount the cradle, as necessary. (For information on mounting the cradle, refer to the documentation included
with the cradle.)
Supplying Power to the Cradle
The cradle receives power from one of two sources:
•
An external power supply.
•
When connected to the host through a host cable that supplies power.
The cradle detects whether the host or the external supply is supplying power. It always draws power from the
external supply when available, regardless of the presence of power from a host.
Using the USB Interface to Supply Power
When the cradle is connected to the host via the USB interface, it can be powered by the USB port instead of an
external power supply. Powering from a USB host limits charging. The scanner charges at a slower rate than when
charging from an external power supply.
Connecting a Synapse Cable Interface
Symbol’s Synapse Smart Cables enable interfacing to a variety of hosts. The appropriate Synapse cable has the
built-in intelligence to detect the host to which it is connected.
Figure 1-6
Synapse Cable Connection
1. Insert the Synapse adapter cable (p/n 25-32463-xx) into the host port on the bottom of the cradle, as described
in Connecting the Cradle on page 1-6.
NOTE Disconnect the power supply before changing host cables, or the cradle may not recognize the new host.
Different cables are required for different hosts. The connectors illustrated in each host chapter are
examples only. The connectors may be different from those illustrated, but the steps to connect the cradle
remain the same.
NOTE The radio link functions normally when the cradle draws power from a USB host.
NOTE Refer to the Synapse Interface Guide provided with the Synapse cable for detailed setup instructions.
Synapse Adapter Cable
To Cradle
Synapse Smart
Cable
To host
1 - 8 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
2. Align the ‘S’ on the Synapse adapter cable with the ‘S’ on the Synapse Smart Cable and plug the cable in.
3. Connect the other end of the Synapse Smart Cable to the host.
Lost Connection to Host
If scanned data does not transmit to the cradle’s host, ensure that all cables are firmly inserted and the power
supply is connected to an appropriate AC outlet. If scanned data still does not transmit to the host, reestablish a
connection with the host:
1. Disconnect the power supply from the cradle.
2. Disconnect the host interface cable from the cradle.
3. Wait three seconds.
4. Reconnect the host interface cable to the cradle.
5. Reconnect the power supply to the cradle, if required.
6. Reestablish pairing with the cradle by scanning the pairing bar code.
Mounting the Cradle
For information on mounting the cradle, refer to the documentation included with the cradle.
NOTE The STB4278 does not always require a power supply whereas the STB4208 always requires a power
supply.
Getting Started 1 - 9
Replacing the Scanner Battery
The battery is installed in the cordless scanner by the factory and resides in a chamber in the scanner handle. To
replace the battery:
1. Insert a Phillips screwdriver in the screw at the base of the scanner, then turn the screw counterclockwise to
release the latch.
2. Remove the latch.
3. If a battery is already installed, turn the scanner upright to slide the battery out. Disconnect the battery
connector clip.
Figure 1-7
Inserting the Battery
4. With the contacts on the connector clips facing in the same direction, attach the new battery’s connector clip to
the connector clip in the base of the scanner.
5. Slide the new battery into the battery well and ensure the battery leads are visible. The battery should sit
securely in the well.
6. Attach and close the latch.
7. Insert a Phillips screwdriver in the screw at the base of the scanner, press down gently, and turn the screw
clockwise to lock the latch in place.
12
3
Battery/scanner
connector clips
45 6
1 - 10 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Charging the Scanner Battery
Fully charge the scanner battery before using the scanner for the first time. To charge the scanner battery, place
the scanner in the cradle, ensuring that the metal contacts on the bottom of the scanner touch the contacts on the
cradle. The battery begins charging when the scanner LED indicator starts flashing green. A complete charge of a
fully discharged battery can take up to three hours using external power and up to five hours using non-external
cable power.
Charging LED
When powered up, the cradle LED is always green. The scanner LED flashes a green during charging. See Table
2-2 on page 2-3 for all charging LED indications.
Reconditioning the Scanner Battery
To maintain optimal performance of the scanner NiMH battery, perform a battery recondition approximately once a
year.
To begin the battery recondition cycle:
1. Scan Battery Recondition below.
Battery Recondition
2. Place the scanner into the cradle.
3. The scanner must perform two charge cycles to complete the battery reconditioning process
(discharge/charge/discharge/charge). See Table 1-1.
CAUTION To avoid a battery temperature fault, always charge the battery in the scanner within the
recommended temperature of 32° to 104° F (0° to 40° C) nominal, 41° to 95° F (5° to 35° C) ideal.
CAUTION If the scanner is removed from the cradle during the battery reconditioning cycle, the scanner exits the
battery reconditioning mode of operation and returns to the normal mode of battery charging (see
Charging the Scanner Battery). To restart the battery reconditioning cycle, re-scan the Battery
Recondition parameter and place the scanner in the cradle..
Getting Started 1 - 11
Battery Reconditioning LED Definitions
Inserting the Scanner in the Cradle
Insert the scanner in the cradle so that the metal contacts on the bottom of the scanner handle touch the contacts
on the cradle. Push the handle lightly to ensure a proper connection, engaging the contacts in the cradle and
scanner. Ensure the desk/wall mount converter knob on the back of the cradle is in the correct position for the
horizontal or vertical mounting.
Horizontal Cradle Mount
When mounting the cradle horizontally, where no fastening is necessary:
1. Ensure the rubber feet are attached to the cradle. These feet provide traction and prevent surface damage.
2. Ensure the desk/wall mount converter knob is in the position shown in Figure 1-8.
Figure 1-8
Horizontal Mount - Inserting the Scanner in the Cradle
Vertical Cradle Mount
When mounting the cradle vertically:
1. Ensure the rubber feet are attached to the cradle. These feet provide traction and prevent surface damage.
2. Ensure the convertible mount hook on the front of the cradle is inserted with the hook facing up. If not, remove
and reverse the hook so that it is in position to secure the scanner in place. (See Figure 1-3 on page 1-4 for the
location of the convertible mount hook.)
Table 1-1
Battery Reconditioning LED Definitions
Battery Reconditioning
Mode LED Comments
Discharging Red Flash Time to discharge is approximately 2.5 hours.
Charging Green Flash Time to charge is approximately 2.5 hours with an
external power supply.
Reconditioning Complete Green - Solid (always on) The scanner enters a trickle charge until the scanner is
removed from the cradle.
Desk/Wall Mount
Converter Knob
1 - 12 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
3. Ensure the desk/wall mount converter knob is in the position shown in Figure 1-9.
Figure 1-9
Vertical Mount - Inserting the Scanner in the Cradle
Radio Communications
The scanner can communicate with remote devices via Bluetooth Technology Profile Support, or by pairing with a
cradle. For radio communication parameters, detailed information about operational modes, Bluetooth Technology
Profile Support and pairing, see Chapter 4, Radio Communications.
Configuring the Scanner
Use the bar codes in this manual or the 123Scan configuration program to configure the scanner. See Chapter 5,
User Preferences and each host chapter for information about programming the scanner using bar code menus.
See Chapter 12, 123Scan to configure the scanner using this configuration program. 123Scan includes a help file.
Desk/Wall
Mount
Converter Knob
NOTE For your convenience, a wall mount bracket can be purchased from Motorola. For the appropriate
measurements, and instructions on mounting the cradle, refer to the STB4208/4278 Quick Reference
Guide (p/n 72-71010-xx).
Getting Started 1 - 13
Accessories
The scanner and cradle accessories that are available separately include:
•
Intellistand for scanning in hands-free mode. For information about set up and use of Intellistand, see
Scanning in Hands-Free Mode on page 2-6.
•
Power supplies for applications that do not supply power over the host cable. See each host interface
chapter for set up information.
•
Wall-mount bracket for mounting the cradle vertically. Refer to the STB4208/4278 Cradle Quick Reference
Guide (p/n 72-71010-xx) for a wall mounting template and installation instructions.
•
Lanyard for wearing the scanner on a wrist.
Lanyard
The lanyard attaches to the inside of the scanner battery door latch.
Figure 1-10
Attached Lanyard
To attach the lanyard:
1. Open the battery door latch as described in Replacing the Scanner Battery on page 1-9. Do not remove the
battery.
1 - 14 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
2. Hook the loop of the lanyard around the screw container inside the battery door latch, between the loop guides.
Figure 1-11
Attaching Lanyard
3. Close the battery door latch.
4. Tighten the screw.
Battery Door
Latch
Loop Guides
Screw Container
Chapter 2 Scanning
Introduction
This chapter provides beeper and LED definitions, scanning techniques, general instructions and tips about
scanning, and decode zone diagrams.
Beeper Definitions
The scanner issues different beep sequences and patterns to indicate status. Table 2-1 defines beep sequences
that occur during both normal scanning and while programming the scanner. (For additional beeper definitions, see
Wireless Beeper Definitions on page 4-3.
Table 2-1
Standard Beeper Definitions
Beeper Sequence Indication
Standard Use
Low/medium/high beeps Power up.
High beep A bar code symbol was decoded (if decode beeper is enabled).
Four long low beeps 1. A transmission error was detected in a scanned symbol. The
data is ignored. This occurs if a unit is not properly configured.
Check option setting.
2. When communicating with a cradle, the cradle acknowledges
receipt of data. If the acknowledgment is not received, this
transmission error beep sequence sounds. Data may still have
been received by the host. Check the host system for receipt of
transmitted data. If data was not received by the host, re-scan the
bar code.
Five low long beeps Conversion or format error.
Low beep Scanner detects power when inserted into a cradle.
Note: This feature is enabled by default and can be disabled (see
Beep on Insertion on page 5-5
).
2 - 2 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Low/high/low/high beeps Out of memory - unable to store a new bar code.
Low/high/low beeps ADF transmit error.
High/high/high/low beeps RS-232 receive error.
Parameter Menu Scanning
Long low/long high beeps Input error, incorrect bar code or
Cancel
scanned, wrong entry,
incorrect bar code programming sequence; remain in program
mode.
High/low beeps Keyboard parameter selected. Enter value using bar code keypad.
High/low/high/low beeps Successful program exit with change in the parameter setting.
Long low/long high/long low/long high beeps Out of host parameter storage space. Scan
Default Parameters on
page 5-3
.
Wireless Operation
High/low/high/low beeps Pairing bar code scanned.
Low/high beeps Bluetooth connection established.
High/low beeps Bluetooth disconnection event.
Note: When connected to a remote device using SPP or HID, if a
disconnect beep sequence sounds immediately after a bar code is
scanned, check the host device for receipt of transmitted data. It is
possible that an attempt was made to transmit the last bar code
scanned after the connection was lost.
Long low/long high beeps Page timeout; remote device is out of range/not powered.
Long low/long high/long low/long high beeps Connection attempt was rejected by remote device.
Code 39 Buffering
High/low beeps New Code 39 data was entered into the buffer.
Three long high beeps Code 39 buffer is full.
Low/high/low beeps The Code 39 buffer was erased or there was an attempt to clear or
transmit an empty buffer.
Low/high beeps A successful transmission of buffered data.
Host Specific
USB only
Four high beeps Scanner has not completed initialization. Wait several seconds and
scan again.
Scanner gives a power-up beep after
scanning a USB Device Type. Communication with the bus must be established before the
scanner can operate at the highest power level.
Table 2-1
Standard Beeper Definitions (Continued)
Beeper Sequence Indication
Scanning 2 - 3
LED Definitions
In addition to beeper sequences, the scanner communicates with the user using a two-color LED display. Table 2-2
defines LED colors that display during scanning.
This power-up beep occurs more than once. The USB bus may put the scanner in a state where power to the
scanner is cycled on and off more than once. This is normal and
usually happens when the host PC cold boots.
RS-232 only
High beep A <BEL> character is received and Beep on <BEL> is enabled
(Point-to-Point mode only).
Table 2-1
Standard Beeper Definitions (Continued)
Beeper Sequence Indication
Table 2-2
Standard LED Definitions
LED Indication
Scanning LED
Green Flash A bar code was successfully decoded.
Charging LED
Green - Slow Continuous Flash
1
Non-critical battery temperature fault. Battery is above or below normal
operating temperature.
If this occurs, do not use the scanner and move the scanner to a location within
normal operating temperature. The scanner can remain in the cradle while the
battery warms or cools to normal operating temperature.
Note: For appropriate charging temperatures, see
Table 3-3 on page 3-9
.
Green - Fast Continuous Flash
2
Scanner is charging.
Green - Solid Scanner is fully charged.
Amber - Continuous Flash Critical battery temperature fault. Battery is above or below normal operating
temperature.
If this occurs, do not use the scanner and move the scanner to a location within
normal operating temperature. The scanner can remain in the cradle while the
battery warms or cools to normal operating temperature.
Note: For appropriate charging temperatures, see
Table 3-3 on page 3-9
.
1
A slow continuous flash is estimated at 1 flash per second.
2
A fast continuous flash is estimated at 2 flashes per second.
2 - 4 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Scanning in Hand-Held Mode
To program the scanner, see the appropriate host chapter, Chapter 4, Radio Communications and Chapter 13,
Symbologies. (In addition to the parameters included in the chapters mentioned, user preference and
miscellaneous scanner option parameters are also available in this guide.)
To scan:
1. Aim the scanner at the bar code.
2. Press the trigger.
Figure 2-1
Scanning in Hand-Held Mode
3. Upon successful decode, the scanner beeps and the LED turns green. (For more information about beeper
and LED definitions, see Table 2-1 and Table 2-2.)
Aiming
On a typical UPC 100% hold the scanner between contact and 19 inches from the symbol (see Decode Zone on
page 2-9). When scanning using a single-line scan mode, ensure the scan line crosses every bar and space of the
symbol.
Figure 2-2
Acceptable and Incorrect Single-Line Aiming
Single-Line Mode Multi-Line Raster Mode
NOTE Scan line lengths vary depending on the scan line width selected (see Scan Line Width on page 5-10). A
full scan line width is the default. Medium and short scan line widths are useful for scanning menus or
pick-lists.
012345 012345
Scanning 2 - 5
When scanning using a multi-line scan mode, at least one scan line must cross every bar and space of the symbol.
Figure 2-3
Acceptable and Incorrect Multi-Line Aiming
Regardless of the scan mode, the scan line is smaller when the scanner is closer to the symbol and larger when it
is farther from the symbol. Scan symbols with smaller bars or elements (mil size) closer to the scanner, and those
with larger bars or elements (mil size) farther from the scanner.
Do not hold the scanner directly over the bar code. Laser light reflecting directly back into the scanner from the bar
code is known as specular reflection. This specular reflection can make decoding difficult.
For more information about scan line widths and scanning modes, see page 5-9 and page 5-10, respectively.
The scanner can be tilted up to 65° forward or back and achieve a successful decode (Figure 2-4). Simple practice
quickly shows what tolerances to work within.
Figure 2-4
Maximum Tilt Angles and Dead Zone
012345
012345
NOTE Scan line lengths vary depending on the scan line width selected. A full scan line width is the default.
Medium and short scan line widths are useful for scanning menus or pick-lists.
65o
65o
2 - 6 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Scanning in Hands-Free Mode
The optional Intellistand adds greater flexibility to scanning operation. When the scanner is seated in the stand’s
“cup,” the scanner’s built-in sensor places the scanner in hands-free mode. When the scanner is removed from the
stand, it automatically switches modes to operate in its normal hand-held triggered mode.
While in Intellistand, the scanner enters low power mode (Intellistand Idle Timeout) when no bar code is decoded
within 15 minutes. See Intellistand Idle Timeout on page 5-5 to set timeout intervals.
Assemble the Stand
Figure 2-5
Assembling Intellistand
NOTE When the scanner enters Intellistand Idle Timeout (low power mode in the stand), scanning capability
suspends. To restart scanning capability, press the trigger or remove the scanner and replace it into the
stand.
Scanning 2 - 7
Scanning with Intellistand
When the scanner is placed in Intellistand, the scan pattern selected in hand-held triggered mode continues (see
Scan Pattern on page 5-9).
To operate the scanner in Intellistand:
1. Ensure the scanner is set up to communicate with the cradle, and the cradle is properly connected to the host
and (see the appropriate host chapter for information on host connections).
2. Insert the scanner in Intellistand by placing the front of the scanner into the stand’s “cup.”
Figure 2-6
Inserting the Scanner in the Intellistand
3. Use the Intellistand’s adjustment knobs to adjust the height and angle of the scanner.
NOTE When the scanner is configured as a Master or Cradle Host and the Bluetooth connection to the remote
device is lost, the scanner must be removed from Intellistand and re-paired to the remote device. To
accomplish this, pull the trigger which engages the auto-reconnect feature, or scan the pairing bar code
for the remote device.
CAUTION When the scanner is not used for an extended period of time, place it in the cradle for charging. This
prolongs battery life symbol indicates that if this information is ignored, the possiblity of data or
material damage may occur.
Scanner Holder
Height Adjustment Knob
Angle Adjustment Knob
Cup
2 - 8 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
4. Present the bar code.
5. Upon successful decode, the scanner beeps and the LED turns green. For more information about beeper and
LED definitions, see Table 2-1 and Table 2-2.
NOTE When the bar code is in view, the scanner emits a full scan line. After a decode, the scan line blinks.
NOTE If no bar code is decoded after 15 minutes in the Intellistand, the scanner enters low power mode, or
Intellistand idle timeout. See Intellistand Idle Timeout on page 5-5 to set the Intellistand idle timeout
interval.
Scanning 2 - 9
Decode Zone
Figure 2-7
LS4278 Decode Zone
Note: Typical performance at 73° F (23° C) on
high quality symbols in normal room light.
LS 4278
*Minimum distance determined by symbol length and scan angle
Depth of Field
*
5 mil 5.5
10 mil
29
20 mil
1.5
13 mil 19
14.5
in.
cm
0
0
5
12.7
10
25.4
15
38.1
20
50.8
25
63.5
30
76.2
35
88.9
40
101.6
W
i
d
t
h
o
f
F
i
e
l
d
00
12.7
25.4
38.1
5
10
in. cm
15
12.75
25.410
15 38.1
2 - 10 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Chapter 3 Maintenance, Troubleshooting &
Technical Specifications
Introduction
This chapter provides suggested scanner and cradle maintenance, troubleshooting, technical specifications, and
signal descriptions (pinouts).
Maintenance
Scanner
Cleaning the exit window is the only maintenance required. A dirty window may affect scanning accuracy.
•
Do not allow any abrasive material to touch the window.
•
Remove any dirt particles with a damp cloth.
•
Wipe the window using a tissue moistened with ammonia/water.
•
Do not spray water or other cleaning liquids directly into the window.
Cradle
•
Do not pour, spray, or spill any liquid on the cradle.
3 - 2 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Battery Information
Symbol rechargeable battery packs are designed and constructed to the highest standards within the industry.
However, there are limitations to how long a battery can operate or be stored before needing replacement. Many
factors affect the life of a battery pack such as heat, cold, customer usage profiles, age and severe drops.
When batteries are stored over a year, battery cell manufacturers advise that some irreversible deterioration in
overall battery quality may occur. To minimize this loss, they recommend storing batteries half charged in a dry,
cool place between 41° F and 77° F (5° C and 25° C), the cooler the better, and removed from the equipment to
prevent the loss of capacity. Batteries should be charged to half capacity at least once a year. If an electrolyte
leakage is observed, avoid any contact with the affected area and properly dispose of the battery.
Replace the battery when a significant loss of run time is detected. Batteries must be charged within the 32° F to
104° F (0° C to 40°C) temperature range.
The standard warranty period for all Symbol batteries is 30 days, regardless if the battery was purchased
separately or included as part of the mobile computer. For more information on Symbol batteries, please visit:
http://mysymbolcare.symbol.com/battery/batbasics1.html.
Troubleshooting
Table 3-1
Troubleshooting
Problem Possible Causes Possible Solutions
Battery
Scanner battery requires frequent
charging. Battery may need reconditioning. Restore the battery by performing a
battery reconditioning cycle. See
Reconditioning the Scanner Battery
on page 1-10
for more information.
Beeper Indications
Scanner emits low/high/low beeps. ADF transmit error. See
Chapter 14, Advanced Data
Formatting
for information about ADF
programming.
Invalid ADF rule is detected. See
Chapter 14, Advanced Data
Formatting
for information about ADF
programming.
The Code 39 buffer was erased or
there was an attempt to clear or
transmit an empty buffer.
Normal when scanning the Code 39
Buffering
Clear Buffer
bar code or
upon attempt to transmit an empty
Code 39 buffer.
Scanner emits a low/high/low/high
beep sequence while it is being
programmed.
Out of ADF parameter storage
space. Erase all rules and re-program with
shorter rules.
Maintenance, Troubleshooting & Technical Specifications 3 - 3
Scanner emits long low/long high
beeps. Input error, incorrect bar code or
Cancel
bar code was scanned. Scan the correct numeric bar codes
within range for the parameter
programmed.
Page timeout; remote device is
out of range/not powered. Move the scanner back into range of
the remote device; try to re-connect;
check remote device configuration.
Scanner emits long low/long
high/long low/long high beeps. Out of host parameter storage
space. Scan
Default Parameters on page
5-3
.
Out of memory for ADF rules. Reduce the number of ADF rules or the
number of steps in the ADF rules.
Connection attempt was rejected
by remote device. Free up remote device resources.
Scanner emits high/high/high/low
beeps. RS-232 receive error. Normal during host reset. Otherwise,
set the scanner's RS-232 parity to
match the host setting.
Scanner emits high/low beeps. The scanner is buffering Code 39
data.
Or
Keyboard parameter selected.
Normal.
Or
Enter value using bar code keypad.
Bluetooth disconnection event. Move the scanner back into range of
the remote device.
In Master (SPP) mode, re-pair the
scanner and cradle by scanning the
PAIR
bar code on the cradle; check
cradle power.
In Slave (SPP/HID) mode, reestablish
connection between the scanner and
remote device from the remote device
side.
Scanner emits three long high
beeps. Code 39 buffer is full. Scan the Code 39 bar code without a
leading space or scan
Do Not Buffer
Code 39
on
page 13-28
to transmit
stored Code 29 data.
Scanner emits four high beeps on
trigger release. Low battery. Place scanner in cradle to charge the
battery.
Table 3-1
Troubleshooting (Continued)
Problem Possible Causes Possible Solutions
3 - 4 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Scanner emits four long low beeps. A transmission error was
detected in a scanned symbol.
The data is ignored.
This occurs if a unit is not properly
configured. Check option setting.
The scanner is either:
- Out of range
- Not paired to the cradle
- Not connected to a remote
Bluetooth device.
Move the scanner back into range of
the remote device.
Or
Scan the
PAIR
bar code on the cradle.
Acknowledgment that transmitted
data was not received by the
cradle.
Data may have been received by the
host. Check the host system for receipt
of transmitted data. If data was not
received by the host, re-scan the bar
code.
Scanner emits five low long beeps. Conversion or format error. Check ADF rules for the host.
Decoding Bar Codes
Scanner emits the laser, but does
not decode the bar code. Scanner is not programmed for
the correct bar code type. Program the scanner to read that type
of bar code. See
Chapter 13,
Symbologies
.
Bar code symbol is unreadable. Scan test symbols of the same bar
code type to determine if the bar code
is defaced.
Distance between scanner and
bar code is incorrect. Move the scanner closer to or further
from the bar code. See
Decode Zone
on page 2-9
.
The scan line is not crossing
every bar and space of the
symbol.
Move the symbol until the scan line is
within the acceptable aiming pattern.
See
Figure 2-2 on page 2-4
.
Scanner decodes bar code, but does
not transmit the data to the host. Scanner is not programmed for
the correct host type. Scan the appropriate host type
programming bar code. See the
chapter corresponding to the host type.
Interface cable is loose. Ensure all cable connections are
secure.
Cradle is not programmed for the
correct host interface. Check scanner host parameters or edit
options.
Scanner not paired to
host-connected interface. Pair the scanner to the cradle by
scanning the
PAIR
bar code on the
cradle.
Table 3-1
Troubleshooting (Continued)
Problem Possible Causes Possible Solutions
Maintenance, Troubleshooting & Technical Specifications 3 - 5
Cradle has lost connection to
host. In this exact order: disconnect power
supply; disconnect host cable; wait
three seconds; reconnect host cable;
reconnect power supply; reestablish
pairing.
Scanner emits five long low beep
after a bar code is decoded. Conversion or format error was
detected.
The scanner’s conversion
parameters are not properly
configured.
Ensure the scanner’s conversion
parameters are properly configured.
Conversion or format error was
detected.
An ADF rule was set up with
characters that can't be sent for
the host selected.
Change the ADF rule, or change to a
host that can support the ADF rule.
Conversion or format error was
detected.
A bar code was scanned with
characters that can't be sent for
that host.
Change the bar code, or change to a
host that can support the bar code.
Host Displays
Host displays scanned data
incorrectly. Scanner is not programmed to
work with the host. Ensure the proper host is selected.
Scan the appropriate host type
programming bar code.
For RS-232, ensure the scanner’s
communication parameters match the
host’s settings.
For a USB HID keyboard or Keyboard
Wedge configuration, ensure the
system is programmed for the correct
keyboard type and language, and turn
off the CAPS LOCK key.
Ensure editing options (e.g., ADF,
UPC-E to UPC-A Conversion) are
properly programmed.
Check the scanner’s host type
parameters or editing options.
Table 3-1
Troubleshooting (Continued)
Problem Possible Causes Possible Solutions
3 - 6 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Trigger
Nothing happens when the trigger is
pulled. No power to the scanner. Check the system power. If the
configuration requires a power supply,
re-connect the power supply.
Check the battery. Ensure that end cap
to battery chamber is secured.
Interface/power cables are loose. Check for loose cable connections and
re-connect cables.
Scanner is disabled. For Synapse or IBM-468x mode,
enable the scanner via the host
interface.
The laser does not appear when the
trigger is pulled. No power to the scanner. Check the system power. If the
configuration requires a power supply,
re-connect the power supply.
Incorrect host interface cable is
used. Verify that the correct host interface
cable is used. If not, connect the
correct host interface cable.
Interface/power cables are loose. Check for loose cable connections and
re-connect cables.
Table 3-1
Troubleshooting (Continued)
Problem Possible Causes Possible Solutions
NOTE If after performing these checks the symbol still does not scan, contact the distributor or contact Motorola
Enterprise Mobility Support. See page xvii for contact information.
Maintenance, Troubleshooting & Technical Specifications 3 - 7
Technical Specifications
Table 3-2
Technical Specifications - Symbol LS4278 Scanner
Item Description
Physical Characteristics
Dimensions 7.3 in. H x 3.85 in. L x 2.7 in. W
(18.5 cm H x 9.7 cm L x 6.9 cm W)
Weight (with battery) Approximately 8.4 oz. (238 g)
Color Cash Register White or Twilight Black
Performance Characteristics
Light Source (Laser) 650nm laser diode
Scan Element Frequency 50Hz
Decode Rate 200 decodes per second
Radio Range Minimum 33 ft (10m) / Typical warehouse environment 50 ft. (15m)
Battery Specifications 720maH NiMH - (3) AAA
number of scans per full charge: 32,000+ @ 1 scan/second
Charge Time:
Fully discharged battery: < 3 hours via external power / approximately 4.5
hours via host power through cable
Note: Typical daily scans are less than 4,000, which fully charges within 1
hour
Roll Tolerance ± 35°
Pitch Tolerance ± 60°
Yaw Tolerance ± 60°
Nominal Working Distance 5 mil (Code 39): 1.5 to 5.5 in. (3.81 to 13.97 cm)
13 mil (100% UPC/EAN): 0 to 19 in. (0 to 48.25 cm)
10 mil (Code 39): 0 to 14 in. (0 to 35.56 cm)
20 mil (Code 39): 0 to 29 in. (0 to 73.66 cm)
(See
Decode Zone on page 2-9
)
Print Contrast Minimum 25% minimum reflectance
Multi-Line Aiming Coverage At 5 in. reading distance: ~ 0.5 in. (1.3 cm)
At 10 in. reading distance: ~ 1 in. (2.5 cm)
Motion Tolerances Horizontal Velocity: 200 in. (508 cm) / sec
Vertical Velocity: 200 in. (508 cm) / sec
Angular Velocity: 200 in. (508 cm) / sec
3 - 8 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Decode Capability UPC/EAN and with supplementals, Code 39, Code 39 Full ASCII, Tri-optic
Code 39, GS1 DataBar Variants, GS1-128, Code 128, Code 128 Full ASCII,
Code 93, Codabar (NW1), Interleaved 2 of 5, Discrete 2 of 5 MSI, Codell,
IATA, Bookland EAN, Code 32
Interfaces Supported See
Table 3-3
.
User Environment
Operating Temperature 32° to 122° F (0° to 50° C)
Storage Temperature -40° to 158° F (-40° to 70° C)
Humidity 5% to 95%, non-condensing
Drop Specifications Withstands multiple 5 ft./1.5 m drops to concrete
# of Cradle Insertions 250,000+ insertions
Ambient Light Immunity Immune to normal artificial indoor and natural outdoor (direct sunlight)
lighting conditions
Regulatory
Electrical Safety UL1950, CSA C22.2 No. 950,
EN60950/IEC950
Laser Safety CDRH Class II, IEC Class 2
EMI/RFI FCC Part 15 Class B, ICES-003 Class B, European
Union EMC Directive, Australian SMA
Radio Bluetooth, Class 2, Version 1.2, Serial Port & HID Profiles
2.402 to 2.480 GHz Adaptive Frequency Hopping (co-existence with 802.11
wireless networks)
Data rate: 720 kbps
Accessories
Mounting Options Intellistand with adjustable height:
5-10 in. (12.7 cm -25.4 cm)
Adjustable angle:
0º - 90º
A desktop / wall-mount bracket is also available.
Lanyard Lanyard attaches to the battery door.
Table 3-2
Technical Specifications - Symbol LS4278 Scanner (Continued)
Item Description
Maintenance, Troubleshooting & Technical Specifications 3 - 9
Table 3-3
Technical Specifications - STB4208/4278 Cradle
Item Description
Physical Characteristics
Dimensions: 2.0 in. H x 8.35 in. L x 3.4 in. W
(5 cm H x 21.1 cm L x 8.6 cm W)
Weight Approximately 6.4 oz. (183 gm)
Voltage & Current Charging Cradle:
Voltage Current
5 +/-10% VDC 620 mA (External power)
5 +/-10% VDC 450 mA (Host power through cable)
12 +/-10% VDC 270 mA (External power)
12 +/-10% VDC 230 mA (Host power through cable)
Non-charging Cradle: 5V @ 70ma or 12 V @ 50 mA
Color Cash Register White or Twilight Black
Power Requirements 4.75 - 14.0 VDC
Performance Characteristics
Interfaces Supported Features on-board Multiple Interface with: RS-232C (Standard, Nixdorf, ICL, & Fujitsu);
IBM 468x/469x; Keyboard Wedge; USB (Standard, IBM SurePOS, Macintosh);
Laser/Wand Emulation; 123Scan; Remote Scanner Management.
In addition, Synapse Adaptive Connectivity allows for connectivity to all of the above plus
many non-standard interfaces.
User Environment
Operating Temperature 32° to 122° F (0° to 50° C)
Storage Temperature -40° to 158° F (-40° to 70° C)
Charging Temperature 32° to 104° F (0° to 40° C) nominal, 41° to 95° F (5° to 35° C) ideal
Humidity 5% to 95% (non-condensing)
Regulatory
Electrical Safety UL1950, CSA C22.2 No. 950,
EN60950/IEC950
EMI/RFI FCC Part 15 Class B, ICES-003 Class B, European Union EMC Directive, Australian
SMA
Radio Bluetooth, Class 2, Version 1.2, Serial Port & HID Profiles
2.402 to 2.480 GHz Adaptive Frequency Hopping (co-existence with 802.11 wireless
networks)
Data rate: 720 kbps
Accessories
Mounting Options Desktop / wall-mount bracket is available
Power Supplies Power supplies are available for applications that do not supply power over host cable.
3 - 10 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Cradle Signal Descriptions
The signal descriptions in Table 3-4 apply to the connector on the scanner and are for reference only.
Figure 3-1 illustrates the positions of the cradle pins.
Figure 3-1
Cradle Pin Assignments
The signal descriptions in Table 3-5 apply to the connector from the scanner to the scanner cradle and are for
reference only.
Table 3-4
Cradle Signal Pin-outs
Pin IBM Synapse RS-232 Keyboard
Wedge Wand USB
1 Reserved SynClock Reserved Reserved Reserved Jump to Pin 6
2 Power Power Power Power Power Power
3 Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground
4 IBM_A(+) Reserved TxD KeyClock DBP Reserved
5 Reserved Reserved RxD TermData CTS D +
6 IBM_B(-) SynData RTS KeyData RTS Jump to Pin 1
7 Reserved Reserved CTS TermClock Reserved D -
8 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
9 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
10 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Table 3-5
Cradle Pin-outs
Pin Description
1CRADLE_TXD
2VCC
3GND
4 CRADLE_RXD
Pin 1
Pin 4 Pin 3 Pin 2
Chapter 4 Radio Communications
Introduction
This chapter provides information about the modes of operation and features available for wireless communication
between scanners, cradles and hosts. The chapter also includes the parameters necessary to configure the
scanner.
The scanner ships with the settings shown in the Radio Communication Default Table on page 4-2 (also see
Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all host device and miscellaneous scanner defaults). If the default
values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile
memory and are preserved even when the scanner is powered down.
If not using a Synapse or USB cable with the cradle, select a host type (see each host chapter for specific host
information) after the power-up beeps sound. This is only necessary upon the first power-up when connected to a
new host.
To return all features to default values, scan a default bar code in Default Parameters on page 5-3. Throughout the
programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*).
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases, scan one bar code to set a specific parameter value.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
*Disable Pair on Contacts Feature/Option
* Indicates Default
4 - 2 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Radio Communications Parameter Defaults
Table 4-1 lists the defaults for radio communication parameters. If you wish to change any option, scan the
appropriate bar code(s) provided in the Radio Communications Parameters section beginning on page 4-4.
NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and
miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 4-1
Radio Communication Default Table
Parameter Default Page
Number
Bluetooth Host (Host Type) Cradle Host
4-4
Discoverable Mode General
4-7
Country Keyboard Types (Country Code) North American
4-8
HID Keyboard Keystroke Delay No Delay (0 msec)
4-10
CAPS Lock Override Disable
4-10
Ignore Unknown Characters Enable
4-11
Emulate Keypad Disable
4-11
Keyboard FN1 Substitution Disable
4-12
Function Key Mapping Disable
4-12
Simulated Caps Lock Disable
4-13
Convert Case No Case Conversion
4-13
Beep on Reconnect Attempt Disable
4-14
Reconnect Attempt Interval 30 sec
4-15
Auto-reconnect in Bluetooth Keyboard
Emulation (HID Slave) Mode On Bar Code Data
4-17
Modes of Operation
(Point-to-Point/Multipoint-to-Point
Point-to-Point
4-18
Parameter Broadcast (Cradle Host Only) Enable
4-19
Pairing Modes Unlocked
4-20
Pairing on Contacts Disable
4-21
Connection Maintenance Interval 15 min
4-23
Authentication Disable
4-25
Variable Pin Code Static
4-26
Encryption Disable
4-27
Radio Communications 4 - 3
Wireless Beeper Definitions
When the scanner scans the pairing bar code it issues various beep sequences indicating successful or
unsuccessful operations. Table 4-2 defines beep sequences that occur during pairing operations. (For additional
beeper definitions, see Beeper Definitions on page 2-1.).
Table 4-2
Wireless Beeper Definitions
Beeper Sequence Indication
Four long low beeps 1. A transmission error was detected in a scanned symbol. The data is ignored.
This occurs if a unit is not properly configured. Check option setting.
2. When communicating with a cradle, the cradle acknowledges receipt of data. If
the acknowledgment is not received, this transmission error beep sequence
sounds. Data may still have been received by the host. Check the host system for
receipt of transmitted data. If data was not received by the host, re-scan the bar
code.
Five high beeps Emitted every 5 seconds while a reconnection attempt is in progress. (See
Auto-reconnect Feature on page 4-14
.)
High/low/high/low beeps Pairing bar code scanned.
Low/high beeps Bluetooth connection established.
High/low beeps Bluetooth disconnection event.
Note: When connected to a remote device using SPP or HID, if a disconnect beep
sequence sounds immediately after a bar code is scanned, check the host device
for receipt of transmitted data. It is possible that an attempt was made to transmit
the last bar code scanned after the connection was lost.
Long low/long high beeps Page timeout; remote device is out of range/not powered. (See
Auto-reconnect
Feature on page 4-14
.)
Long low/long high/long low/
long high beeps Connection attempt was rejected by remote device.
Note: In the case of
Pairing Methods on page 4-21
, the cradle may already be
connected to another scanner in single Point-to-Point locked mode, or the piconet
may be full in Multipoint-to-Point mode. If Pair On Contacts is enabled and the
scanner that is inserted is already connected to the cradle, no beeping occurs.
4 - 4 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Radio Communications Host Types
To set up the scanner for communication with a cradle, or to use standard Bluetooth profiles, scan the appropriate
host type bar code below.
•
Cradle Host (default) - Select this host type for scanner(s) to cradle operation. The scanner must then be
paired to the cradle and the cradle communicates directly to the host via the host interface cable connection.
•
Serial Port Profile (Master) - Select this host type for Bluetooth Technology Profile Support (see page 4-6).
The scanner connects to the PC/host via Bluetooth and performs like there’s a serial connection. The
scanner initiates the connection to the remote device and is the Master. Scan Serial Port Profile (Master),
then scan the PAIR bar code for the remote device. See Pairing Bar Code Format on page 4-22 for
information about creating a pairing bar code for a remote device.
•
Serial Port Profile (Slave) - Select this host type for Bluetooth Technology Profile Support (see page 4-6). The
scanner connects to the PC/host via Bluetooth and performs like there’s a serial connection. The scanner
accepts incoming connection requested from a remote device and is the Slave. Scan Serial Port Profile
(Slave) and wait for the incoming connection.
•
Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation (HID Slave) - Select this host type for Bluetooth Technology Profile Support.
(See page 4-6 for Bluetooth Technology Profile Support and Master/Slave definitions.) The scanner connects
to the PC/host via Bluetooth and performs like a keyboard. The scanner accepts incoming connection
requested from a remote device and is the slave. Scan Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation (HID Slave) and
wait for the incoming connection.
NOTE 1.The scanner supports keyboard emulation over the Bluetooth HID profile. For detailed information, and
HID host parameters, see HID Host Parameters on page 4-8.
2. When the scanner is paired to the cradle in SPP Master or Cradle Host mode, the scanner
automatically tries to reconnect to a remote device when a disconnection occurs that is due to the radio
losing communication. For more information see Auto-reconnect Feature on page 4-14.
Radio Communications 4 - 5
Radio Communications Host Types (continued)
*Cradle Host
Serial Port Profile (Master)
Serial Port Profile (Slave)
Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation (HID Slave)
4 - 6 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Bluetooth Technology Profile Support
With Bluetooth Technology Profile Support, the cradle is not required for wireless communication. The scanner
communicates directly to the host using Bluetooth technology. The scanner supports the standard Bluetooth Serial
Port Profile (SPP) and HID Profiles which enable the scanner to communicate with other Bluetooth devices that
support these profiles.
•
SPP - the scanner connects to the PC/host via Bluetooth and performs like there’s a serial connection.
•
HID - the scanner connects to the PC/host via Bluetooth and performs like a keyboard.
Master/Slave Set Up
The scanner can be set up as a Master or Slave.
When the scanner is set up as a Slave, it is discoverable and connectable to other devices. When the scanner is
set up as a Master, the Bluetooth address of the remote device to which a connection is requested is required. A
pairing bar code with the remote device address must be created and scanned to attempt a connection to the
remote device. See the Pairing Bar Code Format on page 4-22 for information about creating a pairing bar code.
Master
When the scanner is set up as a Master (SPP), it initiates the radio connection to a slave device. Initiating the
connection is done by scanning a pairing bar code for the remote device (see Pairing Bar Code Format on page
4-22).
Slave
When the scanner is set up as a Slave device (SPP), the scanner accepts an incoming connection request from a
remote device.
NOTE The number of scanners is dependent on the host’s capability.
Radio Communications 4 - 7
Bluetooth Friendly Name
You can set a meaningful name for the scanner that appears in the application during device discovery. The default
name is the scanner name followed by its serial number, e.g., LS4278 123456789ABCDEF. Scanning Set Defaults
reverts the scanner to this name; use custom defaults to maintain the user-programmed name through a Set
Defaults operation.
To set a new Bluetooth Friendly Name, scan the following bar code, then scan up to 23 characters from Appendix
E, Alphanumeric Bar Codes. If the name contains less than 23 characters, scan End of Message on page E-7 after
entering the name.
Discoverable Mode
Select a discoverable mode based on the device initiating discovery:
•
Select General Discoverable Mode when initiating connection from a PC.
•
Select Limited Discoverable Mode when initiating connection from a mobile device (e.g., Motorola Q), and
the device does not appear in General Discoverable Mode. Note that it can take longer to discover the device
in this mode.
The device remains in Limited Discoverable Mode for 30 seconds, and green LEDs flash while in this mode.
It is then non-discoverable. To re-active Limited Discoverable Mode, press the trigger.
NOTE If your application allows you to set a device name, this takes precedence over the Bluetooth Friendly
Name.
Bluetooth Friendly Name
*General Discoverable Mode
Limited Discoverable Mode
4 - 8 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
HID Host Parameters
The scanner supports keyboard emulation over the Bluetooth HID profile. In this mode the scanner can interact
with Bluetooth enabled hosts supporting the HID profile as a Bluetooth keyboard. Scanned data is transmitted to
the host as keystrokes.
Following are the keyboard parameters supported by the HID host.
HID Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes)
Scan the bar code corresponding to the keyboard type.
*North American Standard Keyboards
French Windows
German Windows
French Canadian Windows 98
Spanish Windows
Italian Windows
Radio Communications 4 - 9
HID Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes - continued)
Swedish Windows
UK English Windows
Japanese Windows
French Canadian Windows 2000/XP
Portuguese/Brazilian Windows
4 - 10 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
HID Keyboard Keystroke Delay
This parameter sets the delay, in milliseconds, between emulated keystrokes. Scan a bar code below to increase
the delay when the HID host requires a slower transmission of data.
HID CAPS Lock Override
When enabled, the case of the data is preserved regardless of the state of the caps lock key. This setting is always
enabled for the “Japanese, Windows (ASCII)” keyboard type and can not be disabled.
*No Delay (0 msec)
Medium Delay (20 msec)
Long Delay (40 msec)
*Do Not Override Caps Lock Key
(Disable)
Override Caps Lock Key
(Enable)
Radio Communications 4 - 11
HID Ignore Unknown Characters
Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. When Send Bar Codes With Unknown
Characters is scanned, all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters, and no error beeps sound. When
Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is scanned, bar codes containing at least one unknown
character are not sent to the host, and an error beep sounds.
Emulate Keypad
When enabled, all characters are sent as ASCII sequences over the numeric keypad. For example, ASCII A is sent
as "ALT make" 0 6 5 "ALT Break."
*Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters
(Enable)
Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters
(Disable)
*Disable Keypad Emulation
Enable Keypad Emulation
4 - 12 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
HID Keyboard FN1 Substitution
When enabled, this parameter allows replacement of any FN1 character in an EAN128 bar code with a Key
Category and value chosen by the user. See FN1 Substitution Values on page 5-15 to set the Key Category and
Key Value.
HID Function Key Mapping
ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as control-key sequences. When this parameter is enabled, the keys in
bold are sent in place of the standard key mapping (see Table 8-2 on page 8-120. Table entries that do not have a
bold entry remain the same whether or not this parameter is enabled.
*Disable Keyboard FN1 Substitution
Enable Keyboard FN1 Substitution
*Disable Function Key Mapping
Enable Function Key Mapping
Radio Communications 4 - 13
Simulated Caps Lock
When enabled, the scanner inverts upper and lower case characters on the scanner bar code as if the Caps Lock
state is enabled on the keyboard. This inversion is done regardless of the current state of the keyboard Caps Lock
state.
Convert Case
When enabled, the scanner converts all bar code data to the selected case.
*Disable Simulated Caps Lock
Enable Simulated Caps Lock
*No Case Conversion
Convert All to Upper Case
Convert All to LowerCase
4 - 14 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Auto-reconnect Feature
When in SPP Master or Cradle Host mode, the scanner automatically tries to reconnect to a remote device when a
disconnection occurs that is due to the radio losing communication. This can happen if the scanner goes out of
range with the remote device, or if the remote device powers down. The scanner tries to reconnect for the period of
time specified by the Reconnect Attempt Interval setting. During that time the green LED continues to blink.
If the auto-reconnect process fails due to page time-outs, the scanner sounds a page timeout beep (long low/long
high) and enters low power mode. The auto-reconnect process can be re-started by pulling the scanner trigger.
If the auto-reconnect process fails because the remote device rejects the connection attempt, the scanner sounds
a connection reject beep sequence (see Wireless Beeper Definitions on page 4-3) and deletes the remote pairing
address. If this happens, a pairing bar code must be scanned to attempt a new connection to the remote device.
The scanner has memory available for storing a remote Bluetooth address for each Master mode (SPP, Cradle).
When switching between these modes, the scanner automatically tries to reconnect to the last device it was
connected to in that mode.
Reconnect Attempt Beep Feedback
When a scanner disconnects as it goes out of range, it immediately attempts to reconnect. While the scanner
attempts to reconnect, the green LED continues to blink. If the auto-reconnect process fails, the scanner emits a
page timeout beep (long low/long high) and stops blinking the LED. The process can be restarted by pulling the
trigger.
The Beep on Reconnect Attempt feature is disabled by default. When enabled, the scanner emits 5 short high
beeps every 5 seconds while the reconnection attempt is in progress.
Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Beep on Reconnect Attempt.
NOTE If a bar code is scanned while the auto-reconnect sequence is in process, a transmission error beep
sequence sounds and the data is not transmitted to the host. After a connection is reestablished, normal
scanning operation returns. For error beep sequence definitions, see Beeper Definitions on page 2-1.
NOTE Switching between Bluetooth host types by scanning a host type bar code (page 4-4) causes the radio to
be reset. Scanning is disabled during this time. It takes several seconds for the scanner to re-initialize the
radio at which time scanning is enabled.
*Disable Beep on Reconnect Attempt
Enable Beep on Reconnect Attempt
Radio Communications 4 - 15
Reconnect Attempt Interval
When a scanner disconnects as it goes out of range, it immediately attempts to reconnect for the default time
interval of 30 seconds. This time interval can be changed to one of the following options:
•
30 seconds
•
1 minute
•
5 minutes
•
30 minutes
•
1 hour
•
Indefinitely.
To set the Reconnect Attempt Interval, scan one of the bar codes below
*Attempt to Reconnect for 30 Seconds
Attempt to Reconnect for 1 Minute
Attempt to Reconnect for 5 Minutes
4 - 16 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Reconnect Attempt Interval (continued)
Attempt to Reconnect for 30 Minutes
Attempt to Reconnect for 1 Hour
Attempt to Reconnect Indefinitely
Radio Communications 4 - 17
Auto-reconnect in Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation (HID Slave) Mode
In Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation (HID Slave) mode, select a re-connect option for when the scanner loses its
connection with a remote device:
•
Auto-reconnect on Bar Code Data: The scanner auto-reconnects when you scan a bar code. With this
option, a delay can occur when transmitting the first characters. The scanner sounds a decode beep upon
bar code scan, followed by a connection, a page timeout, a rejection beep, or a transmission error beep.
Select this option to optimize battery life on the scanner and mobile device. Note that auto-reconnect does
not occur on rejection and cable unplug commands.
•
Auto-reconnect Immediately: When the scanner loses connection, it attempts to reconnect. If a page
timeout occurs, the scanner attempts reconnect on a trigger pull. Select this option if the scanner’s battery life
is not an issue and you do not want a delay to occur when the first bar code is transmitted. Note that
auto-reconnect does not occur on rejection and cable unplug commands.
•
Disable Auto-reconnect: When the scanner loses connection, you must re-establish it manually.
Out of Range Indicator
An out of range indicator can be set by scanning Enable Beep on Reconnect Attempt on page 4-14 and extending
the time using the Reconnect Attempt Interval on page 4-15.
For example, with Beep on Reconnect Attempt disabled while the scanner loses radio connection when it is taken
out of range, the scanner attempts to reconnect silently during the time interval set by scanning a Reconnect
Attempt Interval.
When Beep on Reconnect Attempt is enabled, the scanner emits 5 high beeps every 5 seconds while the
reconnection attempt is in progress. If the Reconnect Attempt Interval is adjusted to a longer period of time, such
as 30 minutes, the scanner emits 5 high beeps every 5 seconds for 30 minutes providing an out of range indicator.
*Auto-reconnect on Bar Code Data
Auto-reconnect Immediately
Disable Auto-reconnect
4 - 18 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Scanner(s) To Cradle Support
Modes of Operation
The charging cradle with radio supports two radio communication modes of operation, allowing the scanner to
communicate wirelessly:
•
Point-to-Point
•
Multipoint-to-Point.
Point-to-Point Communication
In Point-to-Point communication mode, the cradle allows one scanner to connect to it at a time. In this mode, the
scanner is paired to the cradle either by insertion into the cradle (if pairing on contacts is enabled, page 4-21), or by
scanning the PAIR bar code on the cradle. Communication can be locked, unlocked (default), or in a lock override
state (see Pairing Modes on page 4-20). In locked mode, locking intervals must be set by scanning a connection
maintenance interval bar code beginning on page 4-23.
To activate this mode of operation, scan Point-to-Point.
Multipoint-to-Point Communication
In Multipoint-to-Point communication mode, up to three scanners can be paired to one cradle.
To activate this mode, the first scanner connected to the cradle must scan the Multipoint-to-Point bar code. This
mode allows a parameter broadcast (page 4-19) feature that forwards parameter bar code settings to all connected
scanners. In this mode, programming one scanner applies the settings to all connected scanners.
To select Point-to-Point or Multipoint-to-Point mode, scan the appropriate bar code.
Multipoint-to-Point Mode
*Point-to-Point Mode
Radio Communications 4 - 19
Parameter Broadcast (Cradle Host Only)
When in multipoint-to-point mode, enable Parameter Broadcast to broadcast all parameter bar codes scanned to
all other scanners in the piconet. If disabled, parameter bar codes are processed by the individual scanner only,
and the scanner ignores parameters broadcast from other scanners or from the cradle.
Pairing
Pairing is the process by which a scanner initiates communication with a cradle. Scanning Multipoint-to-Point
activates multi scanner-to-cradle operation and allows up to three scanners to pair to one cradle. The cradle
includes a pairing bar code.
To pair the scanner with the cradle, scan the pairing bar code on the cradle. A high/low/high/low beep sequence
indicates that the pairing bar code was decoded. When a connection between the cradle and scanner is
established, a low/high beep sounds.
*Enable Parameter Broadcast
Disable Parameter Broadcast
NOTE 1. The pairing bar code that connects the scanner to a cradle is unique to each cradle.
2. Do not scan data or parameters until pairing completes.
3. When the scanner is paired to the cradle in SPP Master or Cradle Host mode, the scanner
automatically tries to reconnect to a remote device when a disconnection occurs that is due to the radio
losing communication. For more information see Auto-reconnect Feature on page 4-14.
4 - 20 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Pairing Modes
When operating with the cradle, two modes of pairing are supported:
•
Locked Pairing Mode - When a cradle is paired (connected) to the scanner (or to three scanners in
Multipoint-to-Point mode), any attempt to connect a different scanner, by either scanning the PAIR bar code
on the cradle or by inserting it into the cradle with the pairing on contacts feature enabled (page 4-21), is
rejected. The currently connected scanner(s) maintain connection. In this mode, you must set a Connection
Maintenance Interval on page 4-23.
•
Unlocked Pairing Mode - Pair (connect) a new scanner to a cradle at any time by either scanning the PAIR
bar code on the cradle or by inserting it into the cradle with the pairing on contacts feature enabled. This
unpairs the previous scanner from the cradle (Point-to-Point mode only).
To set the cradle pairing mode, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Lock Override
Lock Override overrides a locked scanner base pairing and connects a new scanner. In Multipoint-to-Point mode,
this unpairs any disconnected (out of range) scanner first, in order to connect the new scanner.
To use Lock Override, scan the bar code below, followed by the pairing bar code on the cradle.
NOTE In Multipoint-to-Point mode, pairing a fourth scanner while in Unlocked Pairing Mode replaces any
disconnected (out of range) scanner. However, if three scanners are actively connected to the cradle, a
fourth scanner cannot connect unless you first disconnect one of the original scanners by scanning the
Unpair bar code.
*Unlocked Pairing Mode
Locked Pairing Mode
LockOverride
Radio Communications 4 - 21
Pairing Methods
There are two pairing methods. The default method allows the scanner and cradle to pair (connect) when the
pairing bar code on the cradle is scanned. A second method pairs the scanner and cradle when the scanner is
inserted in the cradle. To enable this feature, scan Enable Pair On Contacts below. With this feature enabled it is
not necessary to scan the pairing bar code on the cradle. If the pairing is successful, a low/high connection beep
sequence sounds a few seconds after the scanner is placed in the cradle. See Wireless Beeper Definitions on
page 4-3 for other beep sequences.
To enable or disable pairing on contacts, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Unpairing
Unpair the scanner from the cradle or PC/host to make the cradle available for pairing with another scanner. Scan
the bar code below to disconnect the scanner from its cradle/PC host.
An unpairing bar code is also included in the Symbol LS4278 Quick Reference Guide.
Enable Pair On Contacts
*Disable Pair on Contacts
Unpairing
4 - 22 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Pairing Bar Code Format
When the scanner is configured as an SPP Master, you must create a pairing bar code for the remote Bluetooth
device to which the scanner can connect. The Bluetooth address of the remote device must be known. Pairing bar
codes are Code 128 bar codes and are formatted as follows:
<Fnc 3>Bxxxxxxxxxxxx
where:
•
B (or LNKB) is the prefix
•
xxxxxxxxxxxx represents the 12-character Bluetooth address.
Pairing Bar Code Example
If the remote device to which the scanner can connect has a Bluetooth address of 11:22:33:44:55:66, then the
pairing bar code is:
Paring Bar Code Content:
‘B’ + Bluetooth Address B112233445566
Radio Communications 4 - 23
Connection Maintenance Interval
When a scanner disconnects from a cradle due to a Link Supervision Timeout, the scanner immediately attempts
to reconnect to the cradle for 30 seconds. If the auto-reconnect process fails, it can be restarted by pulling the
scanner trigger.
To guarantee that a disconnected scanner can reconnect when it comes back in range, the cradle reserves the
connection for that scanner for a period of time defined by the Connection Maintenance Interval. If the cradle is
supporting the maximum three scanners and one scanner disconnects, a fourth scanner cannot pair to the cradle
during this interval. To connect another scanner: either wait until the connection maintenance interval expires then
scan the PAIR bar code on the cradle with the new scanner; or, scan Lock Override (page 4-20) with the new
scanner then scan the PAIR bar code on the cradle.
Connection Maintenance Interval options are:
•
15 minutes
•
30 minutes
•
One hour
•
Two hours
•
Four hours
•
Eight hours
•
24 hours
•
Indefinitely.
Considerations
The system administrator determines the Connection Maintenance Interval. A shorter interval allows new users to
gain access to abandoned connections more quickly, but causes problems if users leave the work area for
extended periods. A longer interval allows existing users to leave the work area for longer periods of time, but ties
up the system for new users.
To avoid this conflict, users who are going off-shift can scan the unpair bar code on page 4-21 to ignore the
Connection Maintenance Interval and make the connection immediately available.
NOTE The Connection Maintenance Interval only applies in locked pairing mode (see page 4-20).
NOTE When the cradle supports the maximum three scanners, it stores the remote pairing address of each
scanner in memory regardless of the scanner condition (e.g., discharged battery). When you want to
change the scanners paired to the cradle, unpair each scanner currently connected to the cradle by
scanning the Unpairing bar code prior and reconnect each appropriate scanner by scanning the PAIR bar
code on the cradle.
4 - 24 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
To set the Connection Maintenance Interval, scan one of the bar codes below
*Set Interval to 15 Minutes
Set Interval to 30 Minutes
Set Interval to 60 Minutes
Set Interval to 2 Hours
Set Interval to 4 Hours
Set Interval to 8 Hours
Set Interval to 24 Hours
Set Interval to Forever
Radio Communications 4 - 25
Bluetooth Security
The scanner supports Bluetooth Authentication and Encryption. Authentication can be requested by either the
remote device or the scanner. When Authentication is requested, the scanner uses its programmed PIN code to
generate a link key. Once Authentication is complete, either device may then negotiate to enable Encryption.
Authentication
To force Authentication with a remote device (including the cradle), scan the Enable Authentication bar code
below. To prevent the scanner from forcing Authentication, scan the Disable Authentication bar code below.
NOTE A remote device can still request Authentication.
Enable Authentication
*Disable Authentication
4 - 26 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
PIN Code
To set the PIN code (e.g., password) on the scanner, scan the bar code below followed by five alphanumeric
programming bar codes (see Appendix E, Alphanumeric Bar Codes. The default PIN code is 12345.
If the scanner communicates with a cradle with security enabled, synchronize the PIN codes on the scanner and
cradle. To achieve this, connect the scanner to the cradle when setting the PIN codes. If the scanner is not
connected to a cradle, the PIN code change only takes affect on the scanner. If security is required between the
scanner and cradle, and the PIN codes do not match, pairing fails. If the PIN codes are not synchronized,
re-synchronize them by disabling security, establishing a connection to the cradle, and then programming a new
PIN code.
Variable PIN Code
The default PIN code is the user-programmed Static PIN Code. Typically, however, HID connections require
entering a Variable PIN Code. If, when attempting connection, the application presents a text box that includes a
PIN, scan the Variable PIN Code bar code, then re-attempt connection. When you hear a beep indicating the
scanner is waiting for an alphanumeric entry, enter the provided variable PIN using the Alphanumeric Bar Codes
on page E-1, then scan End of Message on page E-7 if the code is less than 16 characters. The scanner discards
the variable PIN code after connection.
Set PIN Code
*Static PIN Code
Variable PIN Code
Radio Communications 4 - 27
Encryption
To set up the scanner for enabling Encryption, scan Enable Encryption. To prevent the scanner from enabling
Encryption, scan Disable Encryption. When enabled, the radio encrypts data.
NOTE Authentication must be performed before Encryption can take effect.
Enable Encryption
* Disable Encryption
4 - 28 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Chapter 5 User Preferences
Introduction
If desired, program the scanner to perform various functions, or activate different features. This chapter describes
each user preference feature and provides the programming bar codes necessary for selecting these features.
The scanner ships with the settings shown in the User Preferences Default Table on page 5-2 (also see Appendix
A, Standard Default Parameters for all host device and miscellaneous defaults). If the default values suit
requirements, programming may not be necessary.
To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile
memory and are preserved even when the scanner is powered down.
If not using a Synapse or USB cable, select a host type (see each host chapter for specific host information) after
the power-up beeps sound. This is only necessary upon the first power-up when connected to a new host.
To return all features to their default values, see Default Parameters on page 5-3. Throughout the programming bar
code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*).
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases, scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to set the beeper tone to high, scan
the High Frequency (beeper tone) bar code listed under Beeper Tone on page 5-4. The scanner issues a fast
warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.
Other parameters, such as Serial Response Time-Out or Data Transmission Formats, require scanning several
bar codes. See these parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, when an error is made during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct
parameter.
*High Frequency Feature/Option
* Indicates Default
5 - 2 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
User Preferences Parameter Defaults
Table 5-1 lists the defaults for user preferences parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar
code(s) provided in the User Preferences section beginning on page 5-3.
NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and
miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 5-1
User Preferences Default Table
Parameter Default Page
Number
User Preferences
Beeper Tone Medium
5-4
Beeper Volume High
5-4
Beep on Insertion Enabled
5-5
Power Mode Reduced Power Mode
5-7
Time Delay to Reduced Power Mode 1 sec
5-8
Intellistand Idle Timeout 15 min
5-5
Scan Pattern Multi-line Always Raster
5-9
Scan Line Width Full Width
5-10
Laser On Time 3.0 sec
5-10
Beep After Good Decode Enable
5-11
Transmit Code ID Character None
5-12
Prefix Value 7013 <CR><LF>
5-13
Suffix Value 7013 <CR><LF>
5-13
Scan Data Transmission Format Data as is
5-15
FN1 Substitution Values Set
5-15
Transmit “No Read” Message Disable
5-15
Synapse Interface Standard
5-16
Batch Mode Normal (Do Not Batch Data)
5-17
User Preferences 5 - 3
User Preferences
Default Parameters
The scanner can be reset to two types of defaults: factory defaults or custom defaults. Scan the appropriate bar
code below to reset the scanner to its default settings and/or set the scanner’s current settings as the custom
default.
•
Restore Defaults - Resets all default parameters as follows:
•If custom default values were configured (see Write to Custom Defaults), the custom default values are
set for all parameters each time the Restore Defaults bar code below is scanned.
•If no custom default values were configured, the factory default values are set for all parameters each time
the Restore Defaults bar code below is scanned. (For factory default values, see Table A-1 beginning on
page A-1.)
•
Set Factory Defaults - Scan the Set Factory Defaults bar code below to eliminate all custom default values
and set the scanner to factory default values. (For factory default values, see Table A-1 beginning on page
A-1.)
•
Write to Custom Defaults - Custom default parameters can be configured to set unique default values for all
parameters. After changing all parameters to the desired default values, scan the Write to Custom Defaults
bar code below to configure custom defaults.
*Restore Defaults
Set Factory Defaults
Write to Custom Defaults
5 - 4 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Beeper Tone
To select a decode beep frequency (tone), scan the Low Frequency, Medium Frequency, or High Frequency bar
code.
Beeper Volume
To select a beeper volume, scan the Low Volume, Medium Volume, or High Volume bar code.
Low Frequency
*Medium Frequency
(Optimum Settings)
High Frequency
Low Volume
Medium Volume
*High Volume
User Preferences 5 - 5
Beep on Insertion
When a scanner is inserted into a cradle and detects power, it emits a short low beep. This feature is enabled by
default.
To enable or disable beeping on insertion, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Intellistand Idle Timeout
While in Intellistand, the scanner enters low power mode when no bar code is decoded within 15 minutes. In the
stand, this low power mode is called Intellistand Idle Timeout.
The default Intellistand idle timeout is 15 minutes. The Intellistand idle timeout can be set to the following intervals:
•
5 minutes
•
10 minutes
•
15 minutes (default)
•
30 minutes
•
1 hour
•
2 hours.
Scan a bar code below to set the Intellistand idle timeout interval.
*Enable Beep on Insertion
Disable Beep on Insertion
NOTE When the scanner enters Intellistand Idle Timeout (low power mode in the stand), scanning capability
suspends. To restart scanning capability, press the trigger or remove the scanner and replace it into the
stand.
5 - 6 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Intellistand Idle Timeout (continued)
5 min
10 min
*15 min
30 min
1 hour
2 hours
User Preferences 5 - 7
Power Mode
This parameter determines whether or not power remains on after a decode attempt. When in reduced power
mode, the scanner enters into a low power consumption mode to preserve battery life after each decode attempt.
When in continuous power mode, power remains on after each decode attempt.
Continuous On
*Reduced Power Mode
5 - 8 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Time Delay to Reduced Power Mode
This parameter sets the time it takes the scanner to enter reduced power mode after any scanning activity. Scan
the appropriate bar code below to set the time.
*1 sec
2 secs
3 secs
4 secs
5 secs
User Preferences 5 - 9
Scan Pattern
This parameter determines the pattern (mode) of scanning. Scan the appropriate bar code below to set the
scanning mode.
•
Single-line Only - Scan Single-line Only for a single-line scan mode. The laser has no up and down scan
line movement (no raster). (For an example of a single-line scan, see Figure 2-2 on page 2-4.)
•
Multi-line Smart Raster - Scan Multi-line Smart Raster for a scan line begins as a single line and moves
up and down (rasters) when a partial scan of a bar code is detected, or no bar code is decoded 500 ms after
the trigger is pulled. Upon seeing a stacked GS1 DataBar code, the scanner immediately rasters. (For an
example of a multi-line scan, see Figure 2-3 on page 2-5.)
•
Multi-line Always Raster (default) - Scan Multi-line Always Raster for rastering (up and down scan line
movement) to begin immediately.
Single-line Only
(No Raster)
Multi-line Smart Raster
*Multi-line Always Raster
5 - 10 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Scan Line Width
Scan a bar code below to set the scan line width.
Laser On Time
This parameter sets the maximum time that decode processing continues during a scan attempt. It is
programmable in 0.1 second increments from 0.5 to 9.9 seconds. The default Laser On Time is 3.0 seconds.
To set a Laser On Time, scan the bar code below. Next, scan two numeric bar codes beginning on page D-1 in
Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired on time. Single digit numbers must have a leading
zero. For example, to set an On Time of 0.5 seconds, scan the bar code below, then scan the “0” and “5” bar
codes. If an error is made, or the selection needs to be changed, scan Cancel on page D-3.
*Full Width
Medium Width
Small Width
Laser On Time
User Preferences 5 - 11
Beep After Good Decode
Scan a bar code below to select whether or not the scanner beeps after a good decode. If Do Not Beep After
Good Decode is selected, the beeper still operates during parameter menu scanning and indicates error
conditions.
*Beep After Good Decode
(Enable)
Do Not Beep After Good Decode
(Disable)
5 - 12 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Transmit Code ID Character
A Code ID character identifies the code type of a scanned bar code. This is useful when the scanner is decoding
more than one code type. In addition to any single character prefix already selected, the Code ID character is
inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol.
Select no Code ID character, a Symbol Code ID character, or an AIM Code ID character. For Code ID Characters,
see Symbol Code Identifiers on page B-1 and AIM Code Identifiers on page B-2.
NOTE If you enable Symbol Code ID Character or AIM Code ID Character, and enable Transmit “No Read”
Message on page 5-15, the scanner appends the code ID for Code 39 to the NR message.
Symbol Code ID Character
AIM Code ID Character
*None
User Preferences 5 - 13
Prefix/Suffix Values
A prefix and/or suffix can be appended to scan data for use in data editing.
To set a value for a prefix or suffix:
1. Change the scan data format by scanning the appropriate Scan Data Transmission Format on page 5-13.
2. Scan the appropriate prefix/suffix bar code on page 5-13.
3. Scan a four-digit number (i.e., four bar codes from Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes) that corresponds to that
value.
4. To correct an error or change a selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
Scan Data Transmission Format
To change the scan data format, scan Scan Options and one of the following four bar codes corresponding to the
desired format:
•
Data As Is
•
<DATA> <SUFFIX>
•
<PREFIX> <DATA>
•
<PREFIX> <DATA> <SUFFIX>.
Scan Enter on page 5-14 to complete the change. To set values for the prefix and/or suffix, see Prefix/Suffix
Values on page 5-13. Scan Data Format Cancel on page 5-14 to cancel the change.
If a carriage return/enter is required after each scanned bar code, scan the following bar codes in order:
1. Scan Options
2. <DATA> <SUFFIX>
3. Enter (on page 5-14).
NOTE When using host commands to set the prefix or suffix, set the key category parameter to 1, then set the
3-digit decimal value. See Table F-1 on page F-1 for the four-digit codes.
Scan Prefix
Scan Suffix
5 - 14 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Scan Data Transmission Format (continued)
Scan Options
*Data As Is
<DATA> <SUFFIX>
<PREFIX> <DATA>
<PREFIX> <DATA> <SUFFIX>
Enter
Data Format Cancel
User Preferences 5 - 15
FN1 Substitution Values
The Wedge and USB HID Keyboard hosts support an FN1 substitution feature. When enabled any FN1 character
(0x1b) in an EAN128 bar code is substituted with a value. This value defaults to 7013 (Enter Key).
To select an FN1 substitution value via bar code menus:
1. Scan the bar code below.
2. Look up the keystroke desired for FN1 Substitution in the ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table on
page F-1 for the currently installed host interface.
3. Enter the 4-digit substitution value by scanning each digit in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes.
To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel.
To enable FN1 substitution for keyboard wedge, scan the Enable FN1 Substitution bar code on page 6-10.
To enable FN1 Substitution for USB HID keyboard, scan the Enable FN1 Substitution bar code on page 8-9.
Transmit “No Read” Message
Scan a bar code below to select whether or not to transmit a No Read message. Enable this to transmit the
characters NR when a bar code does not decode. Disable this to send nothing to the host if a symbol does not
decode.
*Set FN1 Substitution Value
NOTE If you enable Transmit No Read, and also enable Symbol Code ID Character or AIM Code ID Character
for Transmit Code ID Character on page 5-12, the scanner appends the code ID for Code 39 to the NR
message.
Enable No Read
*Disable No Read
5 - 16 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Synapse Interface
The auto-detection of a Synapse cable varies in duration depending on the type of Synapse connection. If a
scanner is connected to another scanner using a Synapse cable, use the Auxiliary Synapse Port connection. In all
other cases, where the cable is used, the default setting is recommended.
To disconnect and reconnect the scanner from a Synapse cable that is connected to a live host via a Synapse, use
the "Plug and Play" setting. Do not change this setting from the default if an on-board wedge host is enabled.
*Standard Synapse Connection
Auxiliary Synapse Port Connection
“Plug and Play” Synapse Connection
User Preferences 5 - 17
Batch Mode
The scanner supports three versions of batch mode. When the scanner is configured for any of the batch modes, it
attempts to store bar code data (not parameter bar codes) until transmission is initialized, or the maximum number
of bar codes are stored. When a bar code is saved successfully, a good decode beep sounds and the LED flashes
green. If the scanner is unable to store a new bar code, a low/high/low/high out of memory beep sounds. (See
pages 2-1, 2-3 and 4-3 for all beeper and LED definitions.)
In all modes, calculate the amount of data (number of bar codes) the scanner can store as follows:
Number of storable bar codes = 2,000 bytes of memory / (number of characters in the bar code + 3).
Modes of Operation
•
Normal (default) - Do not batch data. The scanner attempts to transmit every scanned bar code.
•
Out of Range Batch Mode - The scanner starts storing bar code data when it loses its connection to a
remote device (for example, when a user holding the scanner walks out of range). Data transmission is
triggered by reestablishing the connection with the remote device (for example, when a user holding the
scanner walks back into range).
•
Standard Batch Mode - The scanner starts storing bar code data after Enter Batch Mode is scanned. Data
transmission is triggered by scanning Send Batch Data.
•
Cradle Contact Batch Mode - The scanner starts storing bar code data when Enter Batch Mode is
scanned. Data transmission is triggered by insertion of the scanner into the cradle.
In all modes, transmissions are halted if the scanner is moved out of range. The scanner resumes when it is back
in range. If a bar code is scanned while batch data is transmitted it is appended to the end of the batched data;
parameter bar codes are not stored.
NOTE Transmission is halted if the connection to the remote device is lost.
NOTE If the scanner is removed from the cradle during batch data transfer, transmission halts until the scanner is
re-inserted in the cradle.
5 - 18 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Batch Mode (continued)
*Normal
Out of Range Batch Mode
Standard Batch Mode
Cradle Contact Batch Mode
Enter Batch Mode
Send Batch Data
Chapter 6 Keyboard Wedge Interface
Introduction
This chapter provides instructions for programming the cradle for keyboard wedge host interface, used to connect
the cradle between the keyboard and host computer. The scanner translates the bar code data into keystrokes,
and transmits the information to the host computer via the cradle interface. The host computer accepts the
keystrokes as if they originated from the keyboard.
This interface adds bar code reading functionality to a system designed for manual keyboard input. In this mode
the keyboard keystrokes are simply passed through.
Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*).
*North American Feature/Option
* Indicates Default
6 - 2 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface
The scanner must be connected to the cradle for the host parameter setting to take effect. When the scanner is not
connected to a cradle, and a host parameter bar code is scanned, a long low/long high beep sequence sounds.
Figure 6-1
Keyboard Wedge Connection with Y-cable
To connect the Keyboard Wedge interface Y-cable:
1. Turn off the host and unplug the keyboard connector.
2. Attach the modular connector of the Y-cable to the host port on the bottom of the scanner cradle. See
Connecting the Cradle on page 1-6.
3. Connect the round male DIN host connector of the Y-cable to the keyboard port on the host device.
4. Connect the round female DIN keyboard connector of the Y-cable to the keyboard connector.
5. If needed, attach the optional power supply to the connector in the middle of the Y-cable.
6. Ensure that all connections are secure.
7. Turn on the host system.
8. Select the Keyboard Wedge host type by scanning the appropriate bar code from Keyboard Wedge Host
Parameters on page 6-4.
9. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter.
NOTE See Chapter 4, Radio Communications for information about scanner/cradle pairing and wireless
communication.
Male DIN
Connector
Female DIN Keyboard
Connector
Keyboard Connector Y-cable
Keyboard Wedge Interface 6 - 3
If a power supply is used, disconnect the power supply before changing host cables or the cradle may not
recognize the new host.
Keyboard Wedge Parameter Defaults
Table 6-1 lists the defaults for Keyboard Wedge host parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar
code(s) in the Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters section beginning on page 6-4.
NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 6-1 are examples
only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the cradle remain the
same.
NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and
miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 6-1
Keyboard Wedge Host Default Table
Parameter Default Page
Number
Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters
Keyboard Wedge Host Type IBM PC/AT& IBM PC Compatibles
1
6-4
Country Types (Country Codes) North American
6-5
Ignore Unknown Characters Send
6-6
Keystroke Delay No Delay
6-7
Intra-Keystroke Delay Disable
6-7
Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation Disable
6-8
Caps Lock On Disable
6-8
Caps Lock Override Disable
6-9
Convert Wedge Data No Convert
6-9
Function Key Mapping Disable
6-10
FN1 Substitution Disable
6-10
Send and Make Break Send
6-11
1
User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
6 - 4 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters
Keyboard Wedge Host Types
Select the Keyboard Wedge host by scanning one of the bar codes below.
IBM PC/AT & IBM PC Compatibles1
IBM AT Notebook
NCR 7052
NOTE 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
Keyboard Wedge Interface 6 - 5
Keyboard Wedge Country Types (Country Codes)
Scan the bar code corresponding to the keyboard type. If the keyboard type is not listed, see Alternate Numeric
Keypad Emulation on page 6-8.
*North American
German Windows
French Windows
French Canadian Windows 95/98
French Canadian Windows XP/2000
Spanish Windows
Italian Windows
6 - 6 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Ignore Unknown Characters
Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. When Send Bar Codes With Unknown
Characters is selected, all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters, and no error beeps sound on the
scanner. When Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected, bar code data is sent up to the
first unknown character, then the scanner issues an error beep.
Keyboard Wedge Country Types (Country Codes continued)
Swedish Windows
UK English Windows
Japanese Windows
Portuguese-Brazilian Windows
*Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters
Do Not Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters
Keyboard Wedge Interface 6 - 7
Keystroke Delay
This is the delay in milliseconds between emulated keystrokes. Scan a bar code below to increase the delay when
hosts require a slower transmission of data.
Intra-Keystroke Delay
When enabled, an additional delay is inserted between each emulated key depression and release. This sets the
Keystroke Delay parameter to a minimum of 5 msec as well.
*No Delay
Medium Delay (20 msec)
Long Delay (40 msec)
Enable Intra-Keystroke Delay
*Disable Intra-Keystroke Delay
6 - 8 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation
This allows emulation of most other country keyboard types not listed in Keyboard Wedge Country Types (Country
Codes) on page 6-5 in a Microsoft® operating system environment.
Caps Lock On
When enabled, the scanner emulates keystrokes as if the Caps Lock key is always pressed. Note that if both Caps
Lock On and Caps Lock Override are enabled, Caps Lock Override takes precedence
Enable Alternate Numeric Keypad
*Disable Alternate Numeric Keypad
Enable Caps Lock On
*Disable Caps Lock On
Keyboard Wedge Interface 6 - 9
Caps Lock Override
When enabled, on AT or AT Notebook hosts, the keyboard ignores the state of the Caps Lock key. Therefore, an ‘A’
in the bar code is sent as an ‘A’ no matter what the state of the keyboard’s Caps Lock key.
Note that if both Caps Lock On and Caps Lock Override are enabled, Caps Lock Override takes precedence.
Convert Wedge Data
When enabled, the scanner converts all bar code data to the selected case.
Enable Caps Lock Override
*Disable Caps Lock Override
Convert to Upper Case
Convert to Lower Case
*No Convert
6 - 10 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Function Key Mapping
ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as control key sequences (see Table 6-2 on page 6-13). When this
parameter is enabled, the keys in bold are sent in place of the standard key mapping. Table entries that do not
have a bold entry remain the same whether or not this parameter is enabled.
FN1 Substitution
When enabled, the scanner replaces FN1 characters in an EAN128 bar code with a keystroke chosen by the user
(see FN1 Substitution Values on page 5-15).
Enable Function Key Mapping
*Disable Function Key Mapping
Enable FN1 Substitution
*Disable FN1 Substitution
Keyboard Wedge Interface 6 - 11
Send Make and Break
When enabled, the scan codes for releasing a key are not sent.
*Send Make and Break Scan Codes
Send Make Scan Code Only
6 - 12 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Keyboard Maps
The following keyboard maps are provided for prefix/suffix keystroke parameters. To program the prefix/suffix
values, see the bar codes on page 5-13.
Figure 6-2
IBM PC/AT
Figure 6-3
NCR 7052 32-KEY
Figure 6-4
NCR 7052 58-KEY
5001 5002
5003 5004
5005 5006
5007 5008
5009 5010
7009
7008
7013
7012
7004
7011
7003
7002
7014
5007 5008
5010
5002
5003 5004
5005 5006
1046
1045
5014
1043
5013
5015
5016
5018
5019
5001
5017
7013
5011
(7013 if double key)
(1048 if double key)
1048 5012
5009
5007 5008
5010
5002
5003 5004
5005 5006
1046
1045
5014
1043
5013
5015
5016
5018
5019
1086
1087
1088
1089
1090
5001
1066
1072 1073
1079 1080
1065 1070
1076 1077
1083 1084
1071
1078
1085
1069
5017
7013
5011
1082
1075
1068
1067
(1043 if double key)
(1048 if double key)
1048 5012
5009
1074
1081
Keyboard Wedge Interface 6 - 13
ASCII Character Set for Keyboard Wedge
NOTE Code 39 Full ASCII interprets the bar code special character ($ + % /) preceding a Code 39 character and
assigns an ASCII character value to the pair. For example, when Code 39 Full ASCII is enabled and a +B
is scanned, it is interpreted as b, %J as ?, and %V as @. Scanning ABC%I outputs the keystroke
equivalent of ABC >..
Table 6-2
Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set
ASCII Value Full ASCII
Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke
1001 $A CTRL A
1002 $B CTRL B
1003 $C CTRL C
1004 $D CTRL D
1005 $E CTRL E
1006 $F CTRL F
1007 $G CTRL G
1008 $H CTRL H/
BACKSPACE
1
1009 $I CTRL I/
HORIZONTAL TAB
1
1010 $J CTRL J
1011 $K CTRL K
1012 $L CTRL L
1013 $M CTRL M/
ENTER
1
1014 $N CTRL N
1015 $O CTRL O
1016 $P CTRL P
1017 $Q CTRL Q
1018 $R CTRL R
1019 $S CTRL S
1020 $T CTRL T
1021 $U CTRL U
1
The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled.
Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.
6 - 14 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
1022 $V CTRL V
1023 $W CTRL W
1024 $X CTRL X
1025 $Y CTRL Y
1026 $Z CTRL Z
1027 %A CTRL [ /
ESC
1
1028 %B CTRL \
1029 %C CTRL ]
1030 %D CTRL 6
1031 %E CTRL -
1032 Space Space
1033 /A !
1034 /B “
1035 /C #
1036 /D $
1037 /E %
1038 /F &
1039 /G ‘
1040 /H (
1041 /I )
1042 /J *
1043 /K +
1044 /L ,
1045 - -
1046 . .
1047 /O /
1048 0 0
1049 1 1
Table 6-2
Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set (Continued)
ASCII Value Full ASCII
Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke
1
The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled.
Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.
Keyboard Wedge Interface 6 - 15
1050 2 2
1051 3 3
1052 4 4
1053 5 5
1054 6 6
1055 7 7
1056 8 8
1057 9 9
1058 /Z :
1059 %F ;
1060 %G <
1061 %H =
1062 %I >
1063 %J ?
1064 %V @
1065 A A
1066 B B
1067 C C
1068 D D
1069 E E
1070 F F
1071 G G
1072 H H
1073 I I
1074 J J
1075 K K
1076 L L
1077 M M
Table 6-2
Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set (Continued)
ASCII Value Full ASCII
Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke
1
The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled.
Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.
6 - 16 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
1078 N N
1079 O O
1080 P P
1081 Q Q
1082 R R
1083 S S
1084 T T
1085 U U
1086 V V
1087 W W
1088 X X
1089 Y Y
1090 Z Z
1091 %K [
1092 %L \
1093 %M ]
1094 %N ^
1095 %O _
1096 %W ‘
1097 +A a
1098 +B b
1099 +C c
1100 +D d
1101 +E e
1102 +F f
1103 +G g
1104 +H h
1105 +I i
Table 6-2
Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set (Continued)
ASCII Value Full ASCII
Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke
1
The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled.
Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.
Keyboard Wedge Interface 6 - 17
1106 +J j
1107 +K k
1108 +L l
1109 +M m
1110 +N n
1111 +O o
1112 +P p
1113 +Q q
1114 +R r
1115 +S s
1116 +T t
1117 +U u
1118 +V v
1119 +W w
1120 +X x
1121 +Y y
1122 +Z z
1123 %P {
1124 %Q |
1125 %R }
1126 %S ~
Table 6-3
Keyboard Wedge ALT Key Character Set
ALT Keys Keystroke
2065 ALT A
2066 ALT B
2067 ALT C
2068 ALT D
2069 ALT E
Table 6-2
Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set (Continued)
ASCII Value Full ASCII
Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke
1
The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled.
Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.
6 - 18 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
2070 ALT F
2071 ALT G
2072 ALT H
2073 ALT I
2074 ALT J
2075 ALT K
2076 ALT L
2077 ALT M
2078 ALT N
2079 ALT O
2080 ALT P
2081 ALT Q
2082 ALT R
2083 ALT S
2084 ALT T
2085 ALT U
2086 ALT V
2087 ALT W
2088 ALT X
2089 ALT Y
2090 ALT Z
Table 6-4
Keyboard Wedge GIU Key Character Set
GUI Keys Keystrokes
3000 Right Control Key
3048 GUI 0
3049 GUI 1
3050 GUI 2
3051 GUI 3
3052 GUI 4
3053 GUI 5
Table 6-3
Keyboard Wedge ALT Key Character Set (Continued)
ALT Keys Keystroke
Keyboard Wedge Interface 6 - 19
3054 GUI 6
3055 GUI 7
3056 GUI 8
3057 GUI 9
3065 GUI A
3066 GUI B
3067 GUI C
3068 GUI D
3069 GUI E
3070 GUI F
3071 GUI G
3072 GUI H
3073 GUI I
3074 GUI J
3075 GUI K
3076 GUI L
3077 GUI M
3078 GUI N
3079 GUI O
3080 GUI P
3081 GUI Q
3082 GUI R
3083 GUI S
3084 GUI T
3085 GUI U
3086 GUI V
3087 GUI W
3088 GUI X
3089 GUI Y
3090 GUI Z
Table 6-4
Keyboard Wedge GIU Key Character Set (Continued)
GUI Keys Keystrokes
6 - 20 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Table 6-5
Keyboard Wedge F Key Character Set
F Keys Keystroke
5001 F1
5002 F2
5003 F3
5004 F4
5005 F5
5006 F6
5007 F7
5008 F8
5009 F9
5010 F10
5011 F11
5012 F12
5013 F13
5014 F14
5015 F15
5016 F16
5017 F17
5018 F18
5019 F19
5020 F20
5021 F21
5022 F22
5023 F23
5024 F24
Keyboard Wedge Interface 6 - 21
Table 6-6
Keyboard Wedge Numeric Keypad Character Set
Numeric Keypad Keystroke
6042 *
6043 +
6044 undefined
6045 -
6046 .
6047 /
6048 0
6049 1
6050 2
6051 3
6052 4
6053 5
6054 6
6055 7
6056 8
6057 9
6058 Enter
6059 Num Lock
6 - 22 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Table 6-7
Keyboard Wedge Extended Keypad Character Set
Extended Keypad Keystroke
7001 Break
7002 Delete
7003 Pg Up
7004 End
7005 Pg Dn
7006 Pause
7007 Scroll Lock
7008 Backspace
7009 Tab
7010 Print Screen
7011 Insert
7012 Home
7013 Enter
7014 Escape
7015 Up Arrow
7016 Dn Arrow
7017 Left Arrow
7018 Right Arrow
Chapter 7 RS-232 Interface
Introduction
This chapter provides instructions for programming the cradle to interface with an RS-232 host interface. The
RS-232 interface is used to attach the scanner cradle to point-of-sale devices, host computers, or other devices
with an available RS-232 port (i.e., COM port).
If the particular host is not listed in Table 6-2, set the communication parameters to match the host device. Refer to
the documentation for the host device.
Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*).
NOTE This scanner uses TTL RS-232 signal levels, which interface with most system architectures. For system
architectures requiring RS-232C signal levels, Motorola offers different cables providing the TTL to
RS-232C conversion. Contact Motorola Enterprise Mobility Support for more information.
*Baud Rate 57,600 Feature/Option
* Indicates Default
7 - 2 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Connecting an RS-232 Interface
This connection is made directly from the cradle to the host computer.
Figure 7-1
RS-232 Direct Connection
To connect the RS-232 interface:
1. Attach the modular connector of the RS-232 interface cable to the host port on the bottom of the scanner
cradle (see Connecting the Cradle on page 1-6).
2. Connect the other end of the RS-232 interface cable to the serial port on the host.
3. Connect the power supply to the serial connector end of the RS-232 interface cable. Plug the power supply
into an appropriate outlet.
4. Select the RS-232 host type by scanning the appropriate bar code from RS-232 Host Types on page 7-6.
5. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter.
NOTE See Chapter 4, Radio Communications for information about scanner/cradle pairing and wireless
communication
The scanner must be connected to the cradle for the host parameter setting to take effect. When the
scanner is not connected to a cradle, and a host parameter bar code is scanned, a long low/long high
beep sequence sounds.
Interface Cable
Serial Port Connection to Host
NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 7-1 are examples
only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the cradle remain the
same.
RS-232 Interface 7 - 3
If a power supply is used, disconnect the power supply before changing host cables or the cradle may not
recognize the new host.
RS-232 Parameter Defaults
Table 7-1 lists the defaults for RS-232 host parameters. If any option needs to be changed, scan the appropriate
bar code(s) provided in the Parameter Descriptions section beginning on page 7-4.
NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and
miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 7-1
RS-232 Host Default Table
Parameter Default Page
Number
RS-232 Host Parameters
RS-232 Host Types Standard
7-6
Baud Rate 9600
7-7
Parity Type None
7-8
Stop Bit Select 1 Stop Bit
7-9
Data Bits (ASCII Format) 8-Bit
7-9
Check Receive Errors Enable
7-10
Hardware Handshaking None
7-10
Software Handshaking None
7-12
Host Serial Response Time-out 2 sec
7-14
RTS Line State Low RTS
7-15
Beep on <BEL> Disable
7-15
Intercharacter Delay 0 msec
7-16
Nixdorf Beep/LED Options Normal Operation
7-17
Ignore Unknown Characters Send Bar Code
7-17
7 - 4 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
RS-232 Host Parameters
Various RS-232 hosts are set up with their own parameter default settings (Table 7-2). Selecting the ICL, Fujitsu,
Wincor-Nixdorf Mode A, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode B, Olivetti, Omron, or terminal sets the defaults listed below.
Table 7-2
Terminal Specific RS-232
Parameter
Standar
d
(Default)
ICL Fujitsu
Wincor-
Nixdorf
Mode A
Wincor-
Nixdorf
Mode
B/OPOS
Olivetti Omron
Transmit Code ID No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Data Transmission
Format Data as is Data/Suffix Data/
Suffix Data/
Suffix Data/Suffix Prefix/Data/
Suffix Data/Suffix
Suffix CR/LF
(7013) CR (1013) CR
(1013) CR (1013) CR (1013) ETX (1002) CR (1013)
Baud Rate 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600
Parity None Even None Odd Odd Even None
Hardware
Handshaking None RTS/CTS
Option 3 None RTS/CTS
Option 3 RTS/CTS
Option 3 None None
Software
Handshaking None None None None None Ack/Nak None
Serial Response
Time-out 2 sec. 9.9 sec. 2 sec. 9.9 sec. 9.9 sec. 9.9 sec. 9.9 sec.
Stop Bit Select One One One One One One One
ASCII Format 8-Bit 8-Bit 8-Bit 8-Bit 8-Bit 7-Bit 8-Bit
Beep On <BEL> Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable
RTS Line State Low High Low Low Low = No
data to send Low High
Prefix None None None None None STX (1003) None
*In the Nixdorf Mode B, if CTS is Low, scanning is disabled. When CTS is High, the user can scan bar
codes.
**If Nixdorf Mode B is scanned without the cradle connected to the proper host, the scanner may
appear unable to scan. If this happens, scan a different RS-232 host type within 5 seconds of cycling
power to the cradle.
RS-232 Interface 7 - 5
RS-232 Host Parameters (continued)
Selecting the ICL, Fujitsu, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode A, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode B, OPOS terminal enables the
transmission of code ID characters listed in Table 7-3 below. These code ID characters are not programmable and
are separate from the Transmit Code ID feature. The Transmit Code ID feature should not be enabled for these
terminals.
Table 7-3
Terminal Specific Code ID Characters
Code Type ICL Fujitsu
Wincor-
Nixdorf
Mode A
Wincor-
Nixdorf
Mode B/OPOS
Olivetti Omron
UPC-A A A A A A A
UPC-E E E C C C E
EAN-8/JAN-8 FF FF B B B FF
EAN-13/JAN-13 F F A A A F
Code 39 C <len> None M M M <len> C <len>
Codabar N <len> None N N N <len> N <len>
Code 128 L <len> None K K K <len> L <len>
I 2 of 5 I <len> None I I I <len> I <len>
Code 93 None None L L L <len> None
D 2 of 5 H <len> None H H H <len> H <len>
GS1-128 L <len> None P P P <len> L <len>
MSI None None O O O <len> None
Bookland EAN F F A A A F
Trioptic None None None None None None
Code 11 None None None None None None
IATA H<len> None H H None None
Code 32 None None None None None None
7 - 6 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
RS-232 Host Types
To select an RS-232 host interface, scan one of the following bar codes.
*Standard RS-232
ICL RS-232
Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode A
Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode B
Olivetti ORS4500
Omron
OPOS/JPOS
Fujitsu RS-232
RS-232 Interface 7 - 7
Baud Rate
Baud rate is the number of bits of data transmitted per second. Set the scanner's baud rate to match the baud rate
setting of the host device. Otherwise, data may not reach the host device or may reach it in distorted form.
Baud Rate 600
Baud Rate 1200
Baud Rate 2400
Baud Rate 4800
*Baud Rate 9600
Baud Rate 19,200
Baud Rate 38,400
7 - 8 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Parity
A parity check bit is the most significant bit of each ASCII coded character. Select the parity type according to host
device requirements.
•
Select Odd parity and the parity bit value is set to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that an odd number of 1
bits are contained in the coded character.
•
Select Even parity and the parity bit value is set to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that an even number of 1
bits are contained in the coded character.
•
Select Mark parity and the parity bit is always 1.
•
Select Space parity and the parity bit is always 0.
•
Select None when no parity bit is required.
Odd
Even
Mark
Space
*None
RS-232 Interface 7 - 9
Stop Bit Select
The stop bit(s) at the end of each transmitted character marks the end of transmission of one character and
prepares the receiving device for the next character in the serial data stream. The number of stop bits selected
(one or two) depends on the number the receiving terminal is programmed to accommodate. Set the number of
stop bits to match host device requirements.
Data Bits (ASCII Format)
This parameter allows the scanner to interface with devices requiring a 7-bit or 8-bit ASCII protocol.
*1 Stop Bit
2 Stop Bits
7-Bit
*8-Bit
7 - 10 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Check Receive Errors
Select whether or not the parity, framing, and overrun of received characters are checked. The parity value of
received characters is verified against the parity parameter selected above.
Hardware Handshaking
The data interface consists of an RS-232 port designed to operate either with or without the hardware handshaking
lines, Request to Send (RTS), and Clear to Send (CTS).
If Standard RTS/CTS handshaking is not selected, scan data is transmitted as it becomes available. If Standard
RTS/CTS handshaking is selected, scan data is transmitted according to the following sequence:
•
The scanner reads the CTS line for activity. If CTS is asserted, the scanner waits up to Host Serial Response
Time-out for the host to de-assert the CTS line. If, after Host Serial Response Time-out, the CTS line is still
asserted, the scanner sounds a transmit error, and any scanned data is lost.
•
When the CTS line is de-asserted, the scanner asserts the RTS line and waits up to Host Serial Response
Time-out for the host to assert CTS. When the host asserts CTS, data is transmitted. If, after Host Serial
Response Time-out, the CTS line is not asserted, the scanner sounds a transmit error, and discards the data.
•
When data transmission is complete, the scanner de-asserts RTS 10 msec after sending the last character.
•
The host should respond by negating CTS. The scanner checks for a de-asserted CTS upon the next
transmission of data.
During the transmission of data, the CTS line should be asserted. If CTS is de-asserted for more than 50 ms
between characters, the transmission is aborted, the scanner sounds a transmission error, and the data is
discarded.
If the above communication sequence fails, the scanner issues an error indication. In this case, the data is lost and
must be rescanned.
If Hardware Handshaking and Software Handshaking are both enabled, Hardware Handshaking takes
precedence.
*Check For Received Errors
(Enable)
Do Not Check For Received Errors
(Disable)
NOTE The DTR signal is jumpered to the active state.
RS-232 Interface 7 - 11
Hardware Handshaking (continued)
•
None: Scan the bar code below if no Hardware Handshaking is desired.
•
Standard RTS/CTS: Scan the bar code below to select Standard RTS/CTS Hardware Handshaking.
•
RTS/CTS Option 1: When RTS/CTS Option 1 is selected, the scanner asserts RTS before transmitting and
ignores the state of CTS. The scanner de-asserts RTS when the transmission is complete.
•
RTS/CTS Option 2: When Option 2 is selected, RTS is always high or low (user-programmed logic level).
However, the scanner waits for CTS to be asserted before transmitting data. If CTS is not asserted within
Host Serial Response Time-out, the scanner issues an error indication and discards the data.
•
RTS/CTS Option 3: When Option 3 is selected, the scanner asserts RTS prior to any data transmission,
regardless of the state of CTS. The scanner waits up to Host Serial Response Time-out for CTS to be
asserted. If CTS is not asserted during this time, the scanner issues an error indication and discards the
data. The scanner de-asserts RTS when transmission is complete.
*None
Standard RTS/CTS
RTS/CTS Option 1
RTS/CTS Option 2
RTS/CTS Option 3
7 - 12 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Software Handshaking
This parameter offers control of the data transmission process in addition to, or instead of, that offered by hardware
handshaking. There are five options.
If Software Handshaking and Hardware Handshaking are both enabled, Hardware Handshaking takes
precedence.
•
None: When this option is selected, data is transmitted immediately. No response is expected from host.
•
ACK/NAK: When this option is selected, after transmitting data, the scanner expects either an ACK or NAK
response from the host. When a NAK is received, the scanner transmits the same data again and waits for
either an ACK or NAK. After three unsuccessful attempts to send data when NAKs are received, the scanner
issues an error indication and discards the data.
The scanner waits up to the programmable Host Serial Response Time-out to receive an ACK or NAK. If the
scanner does not get a response in this time, it issues an error indication and discards the data. There are no
retries when a time-out occurs.
•
ENQ: When this option is selected, the scanner waits for an ENQ character from the host before transmitting
data. If an ENQ is not received within the Host Serial Response Time-out, the scanner issues an error
indication and discards the data. The host must transmit an ENQ character at least every Host Serial
Response Time-out to prevent transmission errors.
•
ACK/NAK with ENQ: This combines the two previous options. For re-transmissions of data, due to a NAK
from the host, an additional ENQ is not required.
•
XON/XOFF: An XOFF character turns the scanner transmission off until the scanner receives an XON
character. There are two situations for XON/XOFF:
•XOFF is received before the scanner has data to send. When the scanner has data to send, it waits up to
Host Serial Response Time-out for an XON character before transmission. If the XON is not received
within this time, the scanner issues an error indication and discards the data.
•XOFF is received during a transmission. Data transmission then stops after sending the current byte.
When the scanner receives an XON character, it sends the rest of the data message. The scanner waits
up to 30 seconds for the XON.
RS-232 Interface 7 - 13
Software Handshaking (continued)
*None
ACK/NAK
ENQ
ACK/NAK with ENQ
XON/XOFF
7 - 14 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Host Serial Response Time-out
This parameter specifies how long the scanner waits for an ACK, NAK, ENQ, XON, or CTS before determining that
a transmission error occurred.
*Minimum: 2 sec
Low: 2.5 sec
Medium: 5 sec
High: 7.5 sec
Maximum: 9.9 sec
RS-232 Interface 7 - 15
RTS Line State
This parameter sets the idle state of the Serial Host RTS line. Scan a bar code below to select Low RTS or High
RTS line state.
Beep on <BEL>
Point-to-Point Mode Only
When this parameter is enabled, the scanner issues a beep when a <BEL> character is detected on the RS-232
serial line. <BEL> is issued to gain a user's attention to an illegal entry or other important event.
*Host: Low RTS
Host: High RTS
NOTE This parameter is not supported in Multipoint-to-Point mode.
Beep On <BEL> Character
(Enable)
*Do Not Beep On <BEL> Character
(Disable)
7 - 16 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Intercharacter Delay
This parameter specifies the intercharacter delay inserted between character transmissions.
*Minimum: 0 msec
Low: 25 msec
Medium: 50 msec
High: 75 msec
Maximum: 99 msec
RS-232 Interface 7 - 17
Nixdorf Beep/LED Options
When Nixdorf Mode B is selected, this indicates when the scanner should beep and turn on its LED after a decode.
Ignore Unknown Characters
Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. When Send Bar Codes with Unknown
Characters is selected, all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters, and no error beeps sound on the
scanner. When Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected, bar code data is sent up to the
first unknown character and then an error beep sounds on the scanner.
*Normal Operation
(Beep/LED immediately after decode)
Beep/LED After Transmission
Beep/LED After CTS Pulse
*Send Bar Code with Unknown Characters
Do Not Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters
7 - 18 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
ASCII Character Set for RS-232
The values in Table 7-4 can be assigned as prefixes or suffixes for ASCII character data transmission.
Table 7-4
ASCII Character Set for RS-232
ASCII Value Full ASCII
Code 39 Encode Character ASCII Character
1000 %U NUL
1001 $A SOH
1002 $B STX
1003 $C ETX
1004 $D EOT
1005 $E ENQ
1006 $F ACK
1007 $G BELL
1008 $H BCKSPC
1009 $I HORIZ TAB
1010 $J LF/NW LN
1011 $K VT
1012 $L FF
1013 $M CR/ENTER
1014 $N SO
1015 $O SI
1016 $P DLE
1017 $Q DC1/XON
1018 $R DC2
1019 $S DC3/XOFF
1020 $T DC4
1021 $U NAK
1022 $V SYN
1023 $W ETB
1024 $X CAN
1025 $Y EM
1026 $Z SUB
RS-232 Interface 7 - 19
1027 %A ESC
1028 %B FS
1029 %C GS
1030 %D RS
1031 %E US
1032 Space Space
1033 /A !
1034 /B "
1035 /C #
1036 /D $
1037 /E %
1038 /F &
1039 /G ‘
1040 /H (
1041 /I )
1042 /J *
1043 /K +
1044 /L ,
1045 - -
1046 . .
1047 /O /
1048 0 0
1049 1 1
1050 2 2
1051 3 3
1052 4 4
1053 5 5
1054 6 6
1057 7 7
1056 8 8
Table 7-4
ASCII Character Set for RS-232 (Continued)
ASCII Value Full ASCII
Code 39 Encode Character ASCII Character
7 - 20 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
1057 9 9
1058 /Z :
1059 %F ;
1060 %G <
1061 %H =
1062 %I >
1063 %J ?
1064 %V @
1065 A A
1066 B B
1067 C C
1068 D D
1069 E E
1070 F F
1071 G G
1072 H H
1073 I I
1074 J J
1075 K K
1076 L L
1077 M M
1078 N N
1079 O O
1080 P P
1081 Q Q
1082 R R
1083 S S
1084 T T
1085 U U
1086 V V
Table 7-4
ASCII Character Set for RS-232 (Continued)
ASCII Value Full ASCII
Code 39 Encode Character ASCII Character
RS-232 Interface 7 - 21
1087 W W
1088 X X
1089 Y Y
1090 Z Z
1091 %K [
1092 %L \
1093 %M ]
1094 %N ^
1095 %O _
1096 %W `
1097 +A a
1098 +B b
1099 +C c
1100 +D d
1101 +E e
1102 +F f
1103 +G g
1104 +H h
1105 +I i
1106 +J j
1107 +K k
1108 +L l
1109 +M m
1110 +N n
1111 +O o
1112 +P p
1113 +Q q
1114 +R r
1115 +S s
1116 +T t
Table 7-4
ASCII Character Set for RS-232 (Continued)
ASCII Value Full ASCII
Code 39 Encode Character ASCII Character
7 - 22 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
1117 +U u
1118 +V v
1119 +W w
1120 +X x
1121 +Y y
1122 +Z z
1123 %P {
1124 %Q |
1125 %R }
1126 %S ~
1127 Undefined
7013 ENTER
Table 7-4
ASCII Character Set for RS-232 (Continued)
ASCII Value Full ASCII
Code 39 Encode Character ASCII Character
Chapter 8 USB Interface
Introduction
This chapter provides instructions for programming the cradle to interface with a USB host. The scanner cradle
connects directly to a USB host, or a powered USB hub. The USB host can power the cradle and recharge the
scanner battery, but this charging method has limitations. See Using the USB Interface to Supply Power on page
1-7.
Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*).
*North American Standard USB Keyboard Feature/Option
* Indicates Default
8 - 2 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Connecting a USB Interface
Figure 8-1
USB Connection
The scanner cradle connects with USB capable hosts including:
•
Desktop PCs and Notebooks
•
Apple™ iMac, G4, iBooks (North America only)
•
IBM SurePOS terminals
•
Sun, IBM, and other network computers that support more than one keyboard.
The following operating systems support the scanner cradle through USB:
•
Windows 98, 2000, ME, XP
•
MacOS 8.5 and above
•
IBM 4690 OS.
The scanner cradle also interfaces with other USB hosts which support USB Human Interface Devices (HID). For
more information on USB technology, hosts, and peripheral devices, visit www.symbol.com/usb.
To connect the USB interface:
1. Attach the modular connector of the USB interface cable to the host port on the bottom of the scanner cradle
(see Connecting the Cradle on page 1-6).
NOTE See Chapter 4, Radio Communications for information about scanner/cradle pairing and wireless
communication
The scanner must be connected to the cradle for the host parameter setting to take effect. When the
scanner is not connected to a cradle, and a host parameter bar code is scanned, a long low/long high
beep sequence sounds.
Interface Cable
USB Series A Connector
USB Interface 8 - 3
2. Plug the series A connector in the USB host or hub, or plug the Plus Power connector in an available port of
the IBM SurePOS terminal.
3. Select the USB device type by scanning the appropriate bar code from USB Device Type on page 8-4.
4. On first installation when using Windows, the software prompts to select or install the Human Interface Device
driver. To install this driver, provided by Windows, click Next through all the choices and click Finished on the
last choice. The cradle powers up during this installation.
5. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter.
If problems occur with the system, see Troubleshooting on page 3-2.
USB Parameter Defaults
Table 8-1 lists the defaults for USB host parameters. If any option needs to be changed, scan the appropriate bar
code(s) provided in the Parameter Descriptions section beginning on page 8-4.
NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 8-1 are examples
only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the scanner cradle
remain the same.
NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and
miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 8-1
USB Host Default Table
Parameter Default Page
Number
USB Host Parameters
USB Device Type HID Keyboard Emulation
8-4
USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) North American
8-5
USB Keystroke Delay No Delay
8-7
USB CAPS Lock Override Disable
8-7
USB Ignore Unknown Characters Send
8-8
Emulate Keypad Disable
8-9
USB FN1 Substitution Disable
8-9
Function Key Mapping Disable
8-9
Simulated Caps Lock Disable
8-10
Convert Case No Case Conversion
8-10
Ignore Beep Disable
8-11
Ignore Bar Code Configuration Disable
8-11
8 - 4 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
USB Host Parameters
USB Device Type
Select the desired USB device type.
NOTE When changing USB Device Types, the scanner automatically restarts. The scanner issues the standard
startup beep sequences.
*HID Keyboard Emulation
IBM Table Top USB
IBM Hand-Held USB
USB OPOS Handheld
USB Interface 8 - 5
USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes)
Scan the bar code corresponding to the keyboard type. This setting applies only to the USB HID Keyboard
Emulation device.
NOTE When changing USB country keyboard types the scanner automatically resets. The scanner issues the
standard startup beep sequences.
*North American Standard USB Keyboard
German Windows
French Windows
French Canadian Windows 95/98
French Canadian Windows 2000/XP
Spanish Windows
8 - 6 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes continued)
Italian Windows
Swedish Windows
UK English Windows
Japanese Windows (ASCII)
Portuguese-Brazilian Windows
USB Interface 8 - 7
USB Keystroke Delay
This parameter sets the delay, in milliseconds, between emulated keystrokes. Scan a bar code below to increase
the delay when hosts require a slower transmission of data.
USB CAPS Lock Override
This option applies only to the HID Keyboard Emulation device. When enabled, the case of the data is preserved
regardless of the state of the caps lock key. This setting is always enabled for the “Japanese, Windows (ASCII)”
keyboard type and can not be disabled.
*No Delay
Medium Delay (20 msec)
Long Delay (40 msec)
Override Caps Lock Key
(Enable)
*Do Not Override Caps Lock Key
(Disable)
8 - 8 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
USB Ignore Unknown Characters
This option applies only to the HID Keyboard Emulation device and IBM device. Unknown characters are
characters the host does not recognize. When Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected, all bar
code data is sent except for unknown characters, and no error beeps sound. When Do Not Send Bar Codes With
Unknown Characters is selected, bar code data is sent up to the first unknown character, then the scanner issues
an error beep.
Emulate Keypad
When enabled, all characters are sent as ASCII sequences over the numeric keypad. For example ASCII A would
be sent as “ALT make” 0 6 5 “ALT Break.”
*Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters
Do Not Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters
*Disable Keypad Emulation
Enable Keypad Emulation
USB Interface 8 - 9
USB Keyboard FN 1 Substitution
This option applies only to the USB HID Keyboard Emulation device. When enabled, this allows replacement of
any FN 1 characters in an EAN 128 bar code with a Key Category and value chosen by the user (see FN1
Substitution Values on page 5-15 to set the Key Category and Key Value).
Function Key Mapping
ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as a control-key sequences (see Table 8-2 on page 8-12). When this
parameter is enabled, the keys in bold are sent in place of the standard key mapping. Table entries that do not
have a bold entry remain the same whether or not this parameter is enabled.
Enable FN1 Substitution
*Disable FN1 Substitution
*Disable Function Key Mapping
Enable Function Key Mapping
8 - 10 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Simulated Caps Lock
When enabled, the scanner inverts upper and lower case characters on the scanner bar code as if the Caps Lock
state is enabled on the keyboard. This inversion is done regardless of the current state of the keyboard’s Caps
Lock state.
Convert Case
When enabled, the scanner converts all bar code data to the selected case.
*Disable Simulated Caps Lock
Enable Simulated Caps Lock
*No Case Conversion
Convert All to Upper Case
Convert All to Lower Case
USB Interface 8 - 11
Optional USB Parameters
If you configure the scanner and find the settings were not saved, or changed, when the system is restarted scan
the bar codes that follow to override USB interface defaults.
Scan a bar code below after setting defaults and before configuring the scanner.
Ignore Beep
The host can send a beep request to the scanner. When this parameter is enabled, the request is not sent to the
attached scanner. All directives are still acknowledged to the USB host as if it were processed.
Ignore Bar Code Configuration
The host has the ability to enable/disable code types. When this parameter is enabled, the request is not sent to
the attached scanner. All directives are still acknowledged to the USB host as if it were processed.
*Disable
Enable
*Disable
Enable
8 - 12 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
ASCII Character Set for USB
Table 8-2
ASCII Character Set for USB
ASCII Value
Full ASCII
Code 39 Encode
Character
Keystroke
1000 %U CTRL 2
1001 $A CTRL A
1002 $B CTRL B
1003 $C CTRL C
1004 $D CTRL D
1005 $E CTRL E
1006 $F CTRL F
1007 $G CTRL G
1008 $H CTRL H/
BACKSPACE
1
1009 $I CTRL I/
HORIZONTAL TAB
1
1010 $J CTRL J
1011 $K CTRL K
1012 $L CTRL L
1013 $M CTRL M/
ENTER
1
1014 $N CTRL N
1015 $O CTRL O
1016 $P CTRL P
1017 $Q CTRL Q
1018 $R CTRL R
1019 $S CTRL S
1020 $T CTRL T
1021 $U CTRL U
1022 $V CTRL V
1023 $W CTRL W
1024 $X CTRL X
1
The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled.
Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.
USB Interface 8 - 13
1025 $Y CTRL Y
1026 $Z CTRL Z
1027 %A CTRL [/
ESC
1
1028 %B CTRL \
1029 %C CTRL ]
1030 %D CTRL 6
1031 %E CTRL -
1032 Space Space
1033 /A !
1034 /B “
1035 /C #
1036 /D $
1037 /E %
1038 /F &
1039 /G ‘
1040 /H (
1041 /I )
1042 /J *
1043 /K +
1044 /L ,
1045 - -
1046 . .
1047 /O /
1048 0 0
1049 1 1
1050 2 2
1051 3 3
1052 4 4
Table 8-2
ASCII Character Set for USB (Continued)
ASCII Value
Full ASCII
Code 39 Encode
Character
Keystroke
1
The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled.
Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.
8 - 14 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
1053 5 5
1054 6 6
1055 7 7
1056 8 8
1057 9 9
1058 /Z :
1059 %F ;
1060 %G <
1061 %H =
1062 %I >
1063 %J ?
1064 %V @
1065 A A
1066 B B
1067 C C
1068 D D
1069 E E
1070 F F
1071 G G
1072 H H
1073 I I
1074 J J
1075 K K
1076 L L
1077 M M
1078 N N
1079 O O
1080 P P
Table 8-2
ASCII Character Set for USB (Continued)
ASCII Value
Full ASCII
Code 39 Encode
Character
Keystroke
1
The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled.
Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.
USB Interface 8 - 15
1081 Q Q
1082 R R
1083 S S
1084 T T
1085 U U
1086 V V
1087 W W
1088 X X
1089 Y Y
1090 Z Z
1091 %K [
1092 %L \
1093 %M ]
1094 %N ^
1095 %O _
1096 %W `
1097 +A a
1098 +B b
1099 +C c
1100 +D d
1101 +E e
1102 +F f
1103 +G g
1104 +H h
1105 +I i
1106 +J j
1107 +K k
1108 +L l
Table 8-2
ASCII Character Set for USB (Continued)
ASCII Value
Full ASCII
Code 39 Encode
Character
Keystroke
1
The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled.
Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.
8 - 16 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
1109 +M m
1110 +N n
1111 +O o
1112 +P p
1113 +Q q
1114 +R r
1115 +S s
1116 +T t
1117 +U u
1118 +V v
1119 +W w
1120 +X x
1121 +Y y
1122 +Z z
1123 %P {
1124 %Q |
1125 %R }
1126 %S ~
Table 8-2
ASCII Character Set for USB (Continued)
ASCII Value
Full ASCII
Code 39 Encode
Character
Keystroke
1
The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled.
Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.
USB Interface 8 - 17
Table 8-3
USB ALT Key Character Set
ALT Keys Keystroke
2064 ALT 2
2065 ALT A
2066 ALT B
2067 ALT C
2068 ALT D
2069 ALT E
2070 ALT F
2071 ALT G
2072 ALT H
2073 ALT I
2074 ALT J
2075 ALT K
2076 ALT L
2077 ALT M
2078 ALT N
2079 ALT O
2080 ALT P
2081 ALT Q
2082 ALT R
2083 ALT S
2084 ALT T
2085 ALT U
2086 ALT V
2087 ALT W
2088 ALT X
2089 ALT Y
2090 ALT Z
8 - 18 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Table 8-4
USB GUI Key Character Set
GUI Key Keystroke
3000 Right Control Key
3048 GUI 0
3049 GUI 1
3050 GUI 2
3051 GUI 3
3052 GUI 4
3053 GUI 5
3054 GUI 6
3055 GUI 7
3056 GUI 8
3057 GUI 9
3065 GUI A
3066 GUI B
3067 GUI C
3068 GUI D
3069 GUI E
3070 GUI F
3071 GUI G
3072 GUI H
3073 GUI I
3074 GUI J
3075 GUI K
3076 GUI L
3077 GUI M
3078 GUI N
3079 GUI O
3080 GUI P
Note:
GUI Shift Keys - The Apple
™
iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the
space bar. Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key, and to the
right of the right ALT key.
USB Interface 8 - 19
3081 GUI Q
3082 GUI R
3083 GUI S
3084 GUI T
3085 GUI U
3086 GUI V
3087 GUI W
3088 GUI X
3089 GUI Y
3090 GUI Z
Table 8-5
USB F Key Character Set
F Keys Keystroke
5001 F1
5002 F2
5003 F3
5004 F4
5005 F5
5006 F6
5007 F7
5008 F8
5009 F9
5010 F10
5011 F11
5012 F12
5013 F13
5014 F14
5015 F15
Table 8-4
USB GUI Key Character Set (Continued)
GUI Key Keystroke
Note:
GUI Shift Keys - The Apple
™
iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the
space bar. Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key, and to the
right of the right ALT key.
8 - 20 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
5016 F16
5017 F17
5018 F18
5019 F19
5020 F20
5021 F21
5022 F22
5023 F23
5024 F24
Table 8-6
USB Numeric Keypad Character Set
Numeric Keypad Keystroke
6042 *
6043 +
6044 undefined
6045 -
6046 .
6047 /
6048 0
6049 1
6050 2
6051 3
6052 4
6053 5
6054 6
6055 7
6056 8
6057 9
6058 Enter
6059 Num Lock
Table 8-5
USB F Key Character Set (Continued)
F Keys Keystroke
USB Interface 8 - 21
Table 8-7
USB Extended Keypad Character Set
Extended Keypad Keystroke
7001 Break
7002 Delete
7003 PgUp
7004 End
7005 Pg Dn
7006 Pause
7007 Scroll Lock
7008 Backspace
7009 Tab
7010 Print Screen
7011 Insert
7012 Home
7013 Enter
7014 Escape
7015 Up Arrow
7016 Down Arrow
7017 Left Arrow
7018 Right Arrow
8 - 22 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Chapter 9 IBM Interface
Introduction
This chapter provides instructions for programming the cradle to interface with an IBM 468X/469X host computer.
Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*).
*Disable Convert to Code 39 Feature/Option
* Indicates Default
9 - 2 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Connecting to an IBM 468X/469X Host
This connection is made directly from the cradle to the host interface.
Figure 9-1
IBM Direct Connection
To connect the IBM 46XX interface:
1. Attach the modular connector of the IBM 46XX interface cable to the host port on the bottom of the scanner
cradle (see Connecting the Cradle on page 1-6).
2. Connect the other end of the IBM 46XX interface cable to the appropriate port on the host (typically Port 9).
3. Select the port address by scanning the appropriate bar code from Port Address on page 9-4.
4. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter.
NOTE See Chapter 4, Radio Communications for information about scanner/cradle pairing and wireless
communication
The scanner must be connected to the cradle for the host parameter setting to take effect. When the
scanner is not connected to a cradle, and a host parameter bar code is scanned, a long low/long high
beep sequence sounds.
Host Port Connector
Interface Cable
NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 9-1 are examples
only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the cradle remain the
same.
If a power supply is used, disconnect the power supply before changing host cables or the cradle may not
recognize the new host.
The only required configuration is the port number. Other scanner parameters are typically controlled by
the IBM system.
IBM Interface 9 - 3
IBM Parameter Defaults
Table 9-1 lists the defaults for IBM host parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s)
provided in the Parameter Descriptions section beginning on page 9-4.
NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and
miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 9-1
IBM Host Default Table
Parameter Default Page
Number
IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters
Port Address None Selected
9-4
Convert Unknown to Code 39 Disable
9-5
Ignore Beep Disable
9-5
Ignore Bar Code Configuration Disable
9-6
9 - 4 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters
Port Address
This parameter sets the IBM 468X/469X port used.
NOTE Scanning one of these bar codes enables the RS-485 interface on the scanner.
* None Selected
Hand-held Scanner Emulation (Port 9B)1
Non-IBM Scanner Emulation (Port 5B)
Table-top Scanner Emulation (Port 17)
NOTE 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
IBM Interface 9 - 5
Convert Unknown to Code 39
Scan a bar code below to enable or disable the conversion of unknown bar code type data to Code 39.
Optional IBM Parameters
If you configure the scanner and find the settings were not saved, or changed, when the system is restarted scan
the bar codes that follow to override IBM interface defaults.
Scan a bar code below after setting defaults and before configuring the scanner.
Ignore Beep
The host can send a beep request to the scanner. When this parameter is enabled, the request is not sent to the
attached scanner. All directives are still acknowledged to the IBM RS485 host as if it were processed.
Enable Convert Unknown to Code 39
*Disable Convert Unknown to Code 39
*Disable
Enable
9 - 6 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Ignore Bar Code Configuration
The host has the ability to enable/disable code types. When this parameter is enabled, the request is not sent to
the attached scanner. All directives are still acknowledged to the IBM RS485 host as if it were processed.
*Disable
Enable
Chapter 10 Wand Emulation Interface
Introduction
This chapter provides instructions for programming the cradle to interface with a wand emulation host. This mode
is used whenever wand emulation communication is needed. The scanner cradle connects either to an external
wand decoder or to a decoder integrated in a portable terminal or Point-of-Sale (POS) terminal.
In this mode the scanner emulates the signal of a digital wand to make it “readable” by a wand decoder.
Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*).
*Transmit Unknown Characters Feature/Option* Indicates Default
10 - 2 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Connecting Using Wand Emulation
To perform Wand Emulation, connect the cradle to a portable data terminal, or a controller which collects the wand
data and interprets it for the host.
Figure 10-1
Wand Emulation Connection
To connect the Wand Emulation interface:
1. Attach the modular connector of the Wand Emulation interface cable to the host port on the bottom of the
scanner cradle (see Connecting the Cradle on page 1-6).
2. Connect the other end of the Wand Emulation interface cable to the wand port on the mobile computer or
controller.
3. Select the Wand Emulation host type by scanning the appropriate bar code from Wand Emulation Host Types
on page 10-4.
4. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter.
NOTE See Chapter 4, Radio Communications for information about scanner/cradle pairing and wireless
communication
The scanner must be connected to the cradle for the host parameter setting to take effect. When the
scanner is not connected to a cradle, and a host parameter bar code is scanned, a long low/long high
beep sequence sounds.
Wand Port
Mobile Computer Interface Cable
NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 10-1 are examples
only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the cradle remain the
same.
If a power supply is used, disconnect the power supply before changing host cables or the cradle may not
recognize the new host.
CAUTION Connect the cradle to a 5 volt decoder only. Connecting the cradle to a 12 volt decoder can damage
the scanner and invalidate the warranty.
Wand Emulation Interface 10 - 3
Wand Emulation Parameter Defaults
Table 10-1 lists the defaults for Wand Emulation host types. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar
code(s) provided in Wand Emulation Host Parameters beginning on page 10-4.
NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and
miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 10-1
Wand Emulation Default Table
Parameter Default Page
Number
Wand Emulation Host Parameters
Wand Emulation Host Types Symbol OmniLink Interface Controller
1
10-4
Leading Margin 80 msec
10-5
Polarity Bar High/Margin Low
10-6
Ignore Unknown Characters Send
10-6
Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Disable
10-7
Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII Disable
10-8
1
User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
10 - 4 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Wand Emulation Host Parameters
Wand Emulation Host Types
Select a Wand Emulation host by scanning one of the bar codes below.
Symbol OmniLink Interface Controller1
Symbol PDT Terminal (MSI)
Symbol PTC Terminal (Telxon)
NOTE 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
Wand Emulation Interface 10 - 5
Leading Margin (Quiet Zone)
Scan a bar code below to select a leading margin duration. A leading margin is the time that precedes the first bar
of the scan, (in milliseconds). The minimum allowed value is 80 msec and the maximum is 250 msec. This
parameter accommodates older wand decoders which cannot handle short leading margins.
NOTE 250 msec is the maximum value that this parameter can attain, however, 200 msec is sufficient.
*80 msec
140 msec
200 msec
10 - 6 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Polarity
Scan a bar code below to select the polarity required by the decoder. Polarity determines how the cradle's Wand
Emulation interface creates the Digitized Barcode Pattern (DBP). DBP is a digital signal that represents the
scanned bar code. Different decoders expect the DBP to be in a certain format. The DBP either has the "highs"
represent bars and the "lows" represent spaces (margins), or the "highs" represent spaces (margins) and the
"lows" represent bars.
Ignore Unknown Characters
Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. When Send Bar Codes With Unknown
Characters is selected, all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters, and no error beeps sound on the
scanner. When Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected, bar codes containing at least
one unknown character are not sent to the host, and the scanner emits an error beep.
*Bar High/Margin Low
Bar Low/Margin High
*Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters
Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters
Wand Emulation Interface 10 - 7
Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39
By default, the Wand Emulation interface sends data to the attached host in the same symbology that was
decoded. This can be a problem for customers with older systems that do not recognize newer symbologies (for
example, GS1 DataBar).
Enabling this parameter ignores the original symbology decoded, and outputs the data as if it were a Code 39 bar
code. Any lowercase characters in the original data stream are transmitted as uppercase characters. This also
allows ADF rules.
If Ignore Unknown Characters is enabled, any characters that do not have a corresponding character in the Code
39 symbology set are replaced by a space.
If Ignore Unknown Characters is disabled, if any characters that do not have a corresponding character are
encountered, the scanner emits an error beep and no data is transmitted.
NOTE ADF Note: By default, the Wand Emulation interface does not allow scanned data to be processed by ADF
rules. Enabling this parameter has the side effect of allowing the scanned data to be processed by the
ADF rules (see Chapter 14, Advanced Data Formatting).
Enable Convert to Code 39 for Wand Host
*Disable Convert to Code 39 for Wand Host
10 - 8 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII
By default, any characters that do not have a corresponding character in the Code 39 symbology set are replaced
by a space. If this parameter is enabled, the data sent to the wand interface is encoded in Code 39 Full ASCII. This
setting requires that the host be able to interpret Code 39 Full ASCII data.
This setting applies only if Convert to Code 39 is also enabled.
*Disable Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion
Enable Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion
Chapter 11 Scanner Emulation Interface
Introduction
This chapter provides instructions for programming the cradle to interface with a scanner emulation host. With
scanner emulation, the cradle connects either to an external decoder or to a decoder integrated in a portable
terminal or Point-of-Sale (POS) terminal.
Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*).
*Parameter Process
and Pass-Through Feature/Option
* Indicates Default
11 - 2 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Connecting Using Scanner Emulation
To perform Scanner Emulation, connect the cradle to a mobile computer, or a controller which collects the data and
interprets it for the host.
Figure 11-1
Scanner Emulation Connection
To connect the Scanner Emulation interface:
1. Attach the modular connector of the Scanner Emulation interface cable to the host port on the bottom of the
scanner cradle (see Connecting the Cradle on page 1-6).
2. Connect the other end of the Scanner Emulation interface cable to the scanner port on the mobile computer or
controller.
3. Scan the Scanner Emulation host bar code from Scanner Emulation Host on page 11-3 to enable the Scanner
Emulation host interface.
4. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter.
If a power supply is used, disconnect the power supply before changing host cables or the cradle may not
recognize the new host.
NOTE See Chapter 4, Radio Communications for information about scanner/cradle pairing and wireless
communication
The scanner must be connected to the cradle for the host parameter setting to take effect. When the
scanner is not connected to a cradle, and a host parameter bar code is scanned, a long low/long high
beep sequence sounds.
Host Port Connector
Interface Cable
NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 11-1 are examples
only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the cradle remain the
same.
CAUTION Connect the cradle to a 5 volt decoder only. Connecting the cradle to a 12 volt decoder can damage
the scanner and invalidate the warranty.
Scanner Emulation Interface 11 - 3
Scanner Emulation Parameter Defaults
Table 11-1 lists the defaults for the Scanner Emulation host. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar
code(s) provided in the Scanner Emulation Host Parameters section beginning on page 11-4.
Scanner Emulation Host
Scan the bar code below to enable the Scanner Emulation host.
NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and
miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 11-1
Scanner Emulation Default Table
Parameter Default Page Number
Beep Style Beep on Successful Transmit
11-4
Parameter Pass-Through Parameter Process and Pass Through
11-5
Convert Newer Code Types Convert Newer Code Types
11-6
Module Width 20 µs
11-6
Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Do Not Convert Bar Codes to Code 39
11-7
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Disable
11-7
Transmission Timeout 3 sec
11-8
Ignore Unknown Characters Ignore Unknown Characters
11-9
Leading Margin 2 ms
11-9
Check for Decode LED Check for Decode LED
11-10
1
User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
Undecoded Scanner Emulation Host
11 - 4 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Scanner Emulation Host Parameters
Beep Style
The Scanner Emulation host supports three beep styles.
•
Beep On Successful Transmit: The scanner beeps when the attached decoder issues the decode signal to
the scanner, so the scanner and the attached decoder beep at the same time.
•
Beep At Decode Time: The scanner beeps upon decode. This results in a double beep sequence from most
decoders, since the scanner beeps, and the decoder beeps (at a different frequency) when it successfully
decodes the output.
•
Do Not Beep: Only the attached decoder issues the decode beep.
*Beep On Successful Transmit
Beep At Decode Time
Do Not Beep
Scanner Emulation Interface 11 - 5
Parameter Pass-Through
The Scanner Emulation host can process parameter bar code messages and send them to the attached decoder.
In this way, customers using Symbol compliant decoders can control the behavior of the entire system by scanning
the necessary parameters only once.
For example, to enable D 2 of 5, scan the D 2 of 5 Enable parameter bar code. The scanner and the attached
decoder both process the parameter.
*Parameter Process and Pass-Through
Parameter Process Only
11 - 6 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Convert Newer Code Types
The scanner supports a variety of code types that are not decodable by attached decoder systems. To allow
compatibility in these environments, the scanner converts these code types to more commonly decodable
symbologies, as per the following chart. Symbologies not listed on this chart are transmitted normally.
When decoding these code types with this parameter disabled, the scanner issues Convert Error beeps and
transmits no data.
Module Width
The standard module width is 20 µs. For an extremely slow decoder system, select 50 µs Module Width.
Scan this code type: Transmitted as:
Code 11 Code 39
Chinese 2 of 5 Code 39
GS1 DataBar (14, Limited, and Expanded) Code 128
Coupon Code Code 128
*Convert Newer Code Types
Reject Newer Code Types
*20 µs Module Width
50 µs Module Width
Scanner Emulation Interface 11 - 7
Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39
Scan the bar code below to enable or disable the conversion of all bar code data to Code 39.
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion
By default, any characters that do not have a corresponding character in the Code 39 symbology set are replaced
by a space. If this parameter is enabled, the data sent to the Scanner Emulation host is encoded in Code 39 Full
ASCII. The host must be able to interpret Code 39 Full ASCII data. This setting applies only if Convert to Code 39
is also enabled.
*Do Not Convert Bar Codes To Code 39
Convert All To Code 39
*Disable Convert Code 39 To Full ASCII
Enable Convert Code 39 To Full ASCII
11 - 8 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Transmission Timeout
The Scanner Emulation host transmits bar code data to the attached decoder and waits for the decoder to assert
the Decode signal, indicating successful transmission. If, after a specified amount of time, the Decode signal is not
asserted (indicating that the attached decoder has not successfully received the bar code data), the scanner issues
transmit error beeps.
Scan a bar code below to select the desired transmission timeout.
*3 Second Transmission Timeout
4 Second Transmission Timeout
5 Second Transmission Timeout
10 Second Transmission Timeout
30 Second Transmission Timeout
Scanner Emulation Interface 11 - 9
Ignore Unknown Characters
Unknown characters are characters the decoder does not recognize. When Ignore Unknown Characters is
selected, all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters, and no error beeps sound. When Convert Error
on Unknown Characters is selected, bar codes containing at least one unknown character are not sent to the
decoder, and a convert error beep sounds.
Leading Margin
Scan a bar code below to select a leading margin duration.
*Ignore Unknown Characters
Convert Error On Unknown Characters
1 ms Leading Margin
*2 ms Leading Margin
3 ms Leading Margin
11 - 10 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Leading Margin (continued)
Check For Decode LED
The attached decoder normally asserts the Decode line to signal to the Scanner Emulation host that it successfully
decoded the transmitted bar code. Some decoders, however, do not assert the Decode signal. In this case, the
scanner emits transmit error beeps to indicate that the bar code was not successfully transmitted. Scan the Ignore
Decode LED bar code to disable the Transmit Error beeps.
5 ms Leading Margin
10 ms Leading Margin
*Check For Decode LED
Ignore Decode LED
Chapter 12 123Scan
Introduction
123Scan is a Windows®-based utility that programs the scanner with all parameters including ADF rules. An ADF
rule modifies bar code data before it is sent to the host to ensure compatibility between bar coded data and the
host application. Scanners can be programmed via PC download or by scanning a sheet of bar codes generated
by the utility. Scanner programming is saved in a file for electronic distribution. The 123Scan program includes a
help file.
Communication with 123Scan
To communicate with the 123Scan program which runs on a host computer running a Windows operating system,
use an RS-232 cable to connect the scanner cradle to the host computer (see Connecting an RS-232 Interface on
page 7-2).
123Scan requirements:
•
Host computer with Windows 98, Windows NT, Windows 2000, or Windows XP
•
Scanner
•
Cradle
•
RS-232 cable.
NOTE See Chapter 4, Radio Communications for information about scanner/cradle pairing and wireless
communication
The scanner must be connected to the cradle for the host parameter setting to take effect. When the
scanner is not connected to a cradle, and a host parameter bar code is scanned, a long low/long high
beep sequence sounds.
12 - 2 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
123Scan Parameter
To communicate with the 123Scan program, load 123Scan, included in the documentation CD-ROM, onto the host
computer, and scan the bar code below. Refer to 123Scan instructions for programming the scanner.
Scan the bar code below to enable the 123Scan interface on the scanner.
123Scan Configuration
Chapter 13 Symbologies
Introduction
This chapter describes symbology features and provides the programming bar codes for selecting these features.
Before programming, follow the instructions in Chapter 1, Getting Started.
The scanner is shipped with the settings shown in the Symbology Parameter Defaults on page 13-2 (also see
Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all host device and miscellaneous defaults). If the default values suit
requirements, programming is not necessary.
To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile
memory and are preserved even when the scanner is powered down.
If not using a Synapse or USB cable, select a host type (see each host chapter for specific host information) after
the power-up beeps sound. This is only necessary upon the first power-up when connected to a new host.
To return all features to default values, scan the appropriate default bar code on page 5-3. Throughout the
programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*).
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases, scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to transmit bar code data without the
UPC-A check digit, simply scan the Do Not Transmit UPC-A Check Digit bar code under Transmit UPC-A Check
Digit on page 13-13. The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful
parameter entry.
Other parameters, such as Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5, require scanning several bar codes. See the individual
parameter, such as Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5, for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
*Enable UPC-A Feature/Option
* Indicates Default
13 - 2 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Symbology Parameter Defaults
page 13-2 lists the defaults for all symbologies parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s)
provided in the Symbologies Parameters section beginning on page 13-5.
NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies and
miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 13-1
Symbology Parameter Defaults
Parameter Default Page
Number
UPC/EAN
UPC-A Enable
13-5
UPC-E Enable
13-5
UPC-E1 Disable
13-6
EAN-8/JAN 8 Enable
13-6
EAN-13/JAN 13 Enable
13-6
Bookland EAN Disable
13-8
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (2 and 5 digits) Ignore
13-9
User-Programmable Supplementals
13-12
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy 7
13-12
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit Enable
13-13
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit Enable
13-13
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit Enable
13-14
UPC-A Preamble System Character
13-14
UPC-E Preamble System Character
13-15
UPC-E1 Preamble System Character
13-16
Convert UPC-E to A Disable
13-17
Convert UPC-E1 to A Disable
13-17
EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend Disable
13-18
Bookland ISBN Format ISBN-10
13-19
UCC Coupon Extended Code Disable
13-20
Code 128
Code 128 Enable
13-21
GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128) Enable
13-21
Symbologies 13 - 3
ISBT 128 (non-concatenated) Enable
13-22
Code 39
Code 39 Enable
13-23
Trioptic Code 39 Disable
13-23
Convert Code 39 to Code 32 (Italian Pharmacy Code) Disable
13-24
Code 32 Prefix Disable
13-24
Set Length(s) for Code 39 2 to 55
13-25
Code 39 Check Digit Verification Disable
13-26
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit Disable
13-26
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Disable
13-27
Buffer Code 39 Disable
13-27
Code 93
Code 93 Disable
13-30
Set Length(s) for Code 93 4 to 55
13-30
Code 11
Code 11 Disable
13-32
Set Lengths for Code 11 4 to 55
13-32
Code 11 Check Digit Verification Disable
13-34
Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) Disable
13-34
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) Enable
13-35
Set Lengths for I 2 of 5 14
13-35
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification Disable
13-37
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit Disable
13-37
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN 13 Disable
13-38
Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF)
Discrete 2 of 5 Disable
13-39
Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5 12
13-39
Chinese 2 of 5
Enable/Disable Chinese 2 of 5 Disable
13-41
Table 13-1
Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter Default Page
Number
13 - 4 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Codabar (NW - 7)
Codabar Disable
13-42
Set Lengths for Codabar 5 to 55
13-42
CLSI Editing Disable
13-44
NOTIS Editing Disable
13-44
MSI
MSI Disable
13-45
Set Length(s) for MSI 2 to 55
13-45
MSI Check Digits One
13-46
Transmit MSI Check Digit Disable
13-47
MSI Check Digit Algorithm Mod 10/Mod 10
13-47
GS1 DataBar
GS1 DataBar-14 Disable
13-48
GS1 DataBar Limited Disable
13-48
GS1 DataBar Expanded Disable
13-48
Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN Disable
13-49
Symbology - Specific Security Levels
Redundancy Level 1
13-50
Security Levels 0
13-52
Bi-directional Redundancy Disable
13-53
Table 13-1
Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter Default Page
Number
Symbologies 13 - 5
UPC/EAN
Enable/Disable UPC-A/UPC-E
To enable or disable UPC-A or UPC-E, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Enable UPC-A
Disable UPC-A
*Enable UPC-E
Disable UPC-E
13 - 6 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Enable/Disable UPC-E1
UPC-E1 is disabled by default.
To enable or disable UPC-E1, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Enable/Disable EAN-13/EAN-8
To enable or disable EAN-13 or EAN-8, scan the appropriate bar code below.
NOTE UPC-E1 is not a UCC (Uniform Code Council) approved symbology.
Enable UPC-E1
*Disable UPC-E1
Symbologies 13 - 7
*Enable EAN-13
Disable EAN-13
*Enable EAN-8
Disable EAN-8
13 - 8 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Enable/Disable Bookland EAN
To enable or disable Bookland EAN, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Enable Bookland EAN
*Disable Bookland EAN
NOTE If you enable Bookland EAN, select a Bookland ISBN Format on page 13-19. Also select either Decode
UPC/EAN Supplementals, Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN Supplementals, or Enable 978/979 Supplemental
Mode in Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals on page 13-9.
Symbologies 13 - 9
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals
Supplementals are bar codes appended according to specific format conventions (e.g., UPC A+2, UPC E+2, EAN
13+2). The following options are available:
•
If you select Ignore UPC/EAN with Supplementals, and the scanner is presented with a UPC/EAN plus
supplemental symbol, the scanner decodes UPC/EAN and ignores the supplemental characters.
•
If you select Decode UPC/EAN with Supplementals, the scanner only decodes UPC/EAN symbols with
supplemental characters, and ignores symbols without supplementals.
•
If you select Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN Supplementals, the scanner decodes UPC/EAN symbols with
supplemental characters immediately. If the symbol does not have a supplemental, the scanner must decode
the bar code the number of times set via UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 13-12 before
transmitting its data to confirm that there is no supplemental.
•
If you select one of the following Supplemental Mode options, the scanner immediately transmits EAN-13
bar codes starting with that prefix that have supplemental characters. If the symbol does not have a
supplemental, the scanner must decode the bar code the number of times set via UPC/EAN/JAN
Supplemental Redundancy on page 13-12 before transmitting its data to confirm that there is no
supplemental. The scanner transmits UPC/EAN bar codes that do not have that prefix immediately.
• Enable 378/379 Supplemental Mode
• Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode
• Enable 977 Supplemental Mode
• Enable 414/419/434/439 Supplemental Mode
• Enable 491 Supplemental Mode
• Enable Smart Supplemental Mode - applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with any prefix listed
previously.
• Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 - applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with a 3-digit
user-defined prefix. User-Programmable Supplementals on page 13-12.
• Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 and 2 - applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with either of
two 3-digit user-defined prefixes. Set the 3-digit prefixes using User-Programmable Supplementals on
page 13-12.
• Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 - applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with any prefix
listed previously or the user-defined prefix set using User-Programmable Supplementals on page 13-12.
• Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 and 2 - applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with any
prefix listed previously or one of the two user-defined prefixes set using User-Programmable
Supplementals on page 13-12.
NOTE If you select 978/979 Supplemental Mode and are scanning Bookland EAN bar codes, see
Enable/Disable Bookland EAN on page 13-8 to enable Bookland EAN, and select a format using
Bookland ISBN Format on page 13-19.
NOTE To minimize the risk of invalid data transmission, select either to decode or ignore supplemental
characters.
13 - 10 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (continued)
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Only With Supplementals
(01h)
*Ignore Supplementals
(00h)
Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals
(02h)
Enable 378/379 Supplemental Mode
(04h)
Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode
(05h)
Enable 977 Supplemental Mode
(07h)
Symbologies 13 - 11
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (continued)
Enable 414/419/434/439 Supplemental Mode
(06h)
Enable 491 Supplemental Mode
(08h)
Enable Smart Supplemental Mode
(03h)
Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1
(09h)
Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 and 2
(0Ah)
Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1
(0Bh)
Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 and 2
(0Ch)
13 - 12 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
User-Programmable Supplementals
If you selected a Supplemental User-Programmable option from Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals on page
13-9, select User-Programmable Supplemental 1 to set the 3-digit prefix. Then select the 3 digits using the
numeric bar codes beginning on page D-1. Select User-Programmable Supplemental 2 to set a second 3-digit
prefix. Then select the 3 digits using the numeric bar codes beginning on page D-1.
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy
With Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals selected, this option adjusts the number of times a
symbol without supplementals is decoded before transmission. The range is from two to thirty times. Five or above
is recommended when decoding a mix of UPC/EAN symbols with and without supplementals, and the
autodiscriminate option is selected. The default is set at 7.
Scan the bar code below to set a decode redundancy value. Next, scan two numeric bar codes in Appendix D,
Numeric Bar Codes. Single digit numbers must have a leading zero. To correct an error or change a selection,
scan Cancel on page D-3.
User-Programmable Supplemental 1
User-Programmable Supplemental 2
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy
Symbologies 13 - 13
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit
The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan the appropriate bar
code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC-A check digit. It is always verified to guarantee
the integrity of the data.
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit
The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan the appropriate bar
code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC-E check digit. It is always verified to guarantee
the integrity of the data.
*Transmit UPC-A Check Digit
Do Not Transmit UPC-A Check Digit
*Transmit UPC-E Check Digit
Do Not Transmit UPC-E Check Digit
13 - 14 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit
The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan the appropriate bar
code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC-E1 check digit. It is always verified to guarantee
the integrity of the data.
UPC-A Preamble
Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol consisting of Country Code and System Character. Three options
are given for transmitting UPC-A preamble to the host device: transmit System Character only, transmit System
Character and Country Code (“0” for USA), and no preamble transmitted. Scan a bar code below to match the host
system.
*Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit
Do Not Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit
No Preamble
(<DATA>)
*System Character
(<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
System Character & Country Code
(< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER>
<DATA>)
Symbologies 13 - 15
UPC-E Preamble
Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol consisting of Country Code and System Character. Three options
are given for transmitting UPC-E preamble to the host device: transmit System Character only, transmit System
Character and Country Code (“0” for USA), and no preamble transmitted. Scan a bar code below to match the host
system.
No Preamble
(<DATA>)
*System Character
(<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
System Character & Country Code
(< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER>
<DATA>)
13 - 16 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
UPC-E1 Preamble
Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol consisting of Country Code and System Character. Three options
are given for transmitting UPC-E1 preamble to the host device: transmit System Character only, transmit System
Character and Country Code (“0” for USA), and no preamble transmitted. Scan a bar code below to match the host
system.
No Preamble
(<DATA>)
*System Character
(<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
System Character & Country Code
(< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER>
<DATA>)
Symbologies 13 - 17
Convert UPC-E to UPC-A
Enable this to convert UPC-E (zero suppressed) decoded data to UPC-A format before transmission. After
conversion, the data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming selections (e.g., Preamble,
Check Digit).
When disabled, UPC-E decoded data is transmitted as UPC-E data, without conversion.
Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A
Enable this to convert UPC-E1 decoded data to UPC-A format before transmission. After conversion, the data
follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming selections (e.g., Preamble, Check Digit).
When disabled, UPC-E1 decoded data is transmitted as UPC-E1 data, without conversion.
Convert UPC-E to UPC-A
(Enable)
*Do Not Convert UPC-E to UPC-A
(Disable)
Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A
(Enable)
*Do Not Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A
(Disable)
13 - 18 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend
When enabled, this parameter adds five leading zeros to decoded EAN-8 symbols to make them compatible in
format to EAN-13 symbols.
When disabled, EAN-8 symbols are transmitted as is.
Enable EAN/JAN Zero Extend
*Disable EAN/JAN Zero Extend
Symbologies 13 - 19
Bookland ISBN Format
Parameter # F1h 40h
If you enabled Bookland EAN using Enable/Disable Bookland EAN on page 13-8, select one of the following
formats for Bookland data:
•
Bookland ISBN-10 - The scanner reports Bookland data starting with 978 in traditional 10-digit format with
the special Bookland check digit for backward-compatibility. Data starting with 979 is not considered
Bookland in this mode.
•
Bookland ISBN-13 - The scanner reports Bookland data (starting with either 978 or 979) as EAN-13 in
13-digit format to meet the 2007 ISBN-13 protocol.
*Bookland ISBN-10
(00h)
Bookland ISBN-13
(01h)
NOTE For Bookland EAN to function properly, first enable Bookland EAN using Enable/Disable Bookland EAN
on page 13-8, then select either Decode UPC/EAN Supplementals, Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN
Supplementals, or Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode in Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals on
page 13-9.
13 - 20 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
UCC Coupon Extended Code
When enabled, this parameter decodes UPCA bar codes starting with digit ‘5’, EAN-13 bar codes starting with digit
‘99’, and UPCA/GS1-128 Coupon Codes. UPCA, EAN-13 and GS1-128 must be enabled to scan all types of
Coupon Codes.
Enable UCC Coupon Extended Code
*Disable UCC Coupon Extended Code
NOTE Use the Decode UPC/EAN Supplemental Redundancy parameter to control autodiscrimination of the
GS1-128 (right half) of a coupon code.
Symbologies 13 - 21
Code 128
Enable/Disable Code 128
To enable or disable Code 128, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Enable/Disable GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128)
To enable or disable GS1-128, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Enable Code 128
Disable Code 128
*Enable GS1-128
Disable GS1-128
13 - 22 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Enable/Disable ISBT 128
ISBT 128 is a variant of Code 128 used in the blood bank industry. Scan the appropriate bar code below to enable
or disable ISBT 128. If necessary, the host must perform concatenation of the ISBT data.
*Enable ISBT 128
Disable ISBT 128
Symbologies 13 - 23
Code 39
Enable/Disable Code 39
To enable or disable Code 39, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Enable/Disable Trioptic Code 39
Trioptic Code 39 is a variant of Code 39 used in the marking of computer tape cartridges. Trioptic Code 39 symbols
always contain six characters. To enable or disable Trioptic Code 39, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Enable Code 39
Disable Code 39
Enable Trioptic Code 39
*Disable Trioptic Code 39
NOTE Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII cannot be enabled simultaneously.
13 - 24 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Convert Code 39 to Code 32
Code 32 is a variant of Code 39 used by the Italian pharmaceutical industry. Scan the appropriate bar code below
to enable or disable converting Code 39 to Code 32.
Code 32 Prefix
Scan the appropriate bar code below to enable or disable adding the prefix character “A” to all Code 32 bar codes.
NOTE Code 39 must be enabled for this parameter to function.
Enable Convert Code 39 to Code 32
*Disable Convert Code 39 to Code 32
NOTE Convert Code 39 to Code 32 must be enabled for this parameter to function.
Enable Code 32 Prefix
*Disable Code 32 Prefix
Symbologies 13 - 25
Set Lengths for Code 39
he length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s)
the code contains. Set lengths for Code 39 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific
range. If Code 39 Full ASCII is enabled, Length Within a Range or Any Length are the preferred options.
•
One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Code 39 symbols containing a selected length.
Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode
only Code 39 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 39 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4.
To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
•
Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Code 39 symbols containing either of two
selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For
example, to decode only those Code 39 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Code 39 - Two
Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan
Cancel on page D-3.
•
Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Code 39 symbol with a specific length range.
Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode
Code 39 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Code 39 - Length Within Range.
Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading zero). To correct an
error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
•
Any Length - Select this option to decode Code 39 symbols containing any number of characters within the
scanner capability.
NOTE When setting lengths for different bar code types by scanning single digit numbers, single digit numbers
must always be preceded by a leading zero.
Code 39 - One Discrete Length
Code 39 - Two Discrete Lengths
Code 39 - Length Within Range
Code 39 - Any Length
13 - 26 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Code 39 Check Digit Verification
When this feature is enabled, the scanner checks the integrity of all Code 39 symbols to verify that the data
complies with specified check digit algorithm. Only Code 39 symbols which include a modulo 43 check digit are
decoded. Enable this feature if the Code 39 symbols contain a Modulo 43 check digit.
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit
Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit Code 39 data with or without the check digit.
Enable Code 39 Check Digit
*Disable Code 39 Check Digit
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit
(Enable)
*Do Not Transmit Code 39 Check Digit
(Disable)
NOTE Code 39 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function.
Symbologies 13 - 27
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion
Code 39 Full ASCII is a variant of Code 39 which pairs characters to encode the full ASCII character set. To enable
or disable Code 39 Full ASCII, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Code 39 Buffering (Scan & Store)
This feature allows the scanner to accumulate data from multiple Code 39 symbols.
Selecting the Scan and Store option (Buffer Code 39) temporarily buffers all Code 39 symbols having a leading
space as a first character for later transmission. The leading space is not buffered.
Decode of a valid Code 39 symbol with no leading space causes transmission in sequence of all buffered data in a
first-in first-out format, plus transmission of the “triggering” symbol. See the following pages for further details.
When the Do Not Buffer Code 39 option is selected, all decoded Code 39 symbols are transmitted immediately
without being stored in the buffer.
Enable Code 39 Full ASCII
*Disable Code 39 Full ASCII
NOTE Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII cannot be enabled simultaneously.
Code 39 Full ASCII to Full ASCII Correlation is host-dependent and is described in the ASCII Character
Set table for the appropriate interface. See Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set on page 6-13, ASCII
Character Set for RS-232 on page 7-18 and ASCII Character Set for USB on page 8-12 for the
appropriate interface.
13 - 28 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
This feature affects Code 39 only. If selecting Buffer Code 39, we recommend configuring the scanner to decode
Code 39 symbology only.
While there is data in the transmission buffer, selecting Do Not Buffer Code 39 is not allowed. The buffer holds
200 bytes of information.
To disable Code 39 buffering when there is data in the transmission buffer, first force the buffer transmission
(see Transmit Buffer on page 13-29) or clear the buffer.
Buffer Data
To buffer data, Code 39 buffering must be enabled and a Code 39 symbol must be read with a space immediately
following the start pattern.
•
Unless the data overflows the transmission buffer, the scanner issues a low/high beep to indicate successful
decode and buffering. (For overflow conditions, see Overfilling Transmission Buffer.)
•
The scanner adds the decoded data excluding the leading space to the transmission buffer.
•
No transmission occurs.
Clear Transmission Buffer
To clear the transmission buffer, scan the Clear Buffer bar code below, which contains only a start character, a
dash (minus), and a stop character.
•
The scanner issues a short high/low/high beep.
•
The scanner erases the transmission buffer.
•
No transmission occurs.
Buffer Code 39
(Enable)
*Do Not Buffer Code 39
(Disable)
Clear Buffer
Symbologies 13 - 29
Transmit Buffer
There are two methods to transmit the Code 39 buffer.
1. Scan the Transmit Buffer bar code below which contains only a start character, a plus (+), and a stop
character.
•The scanner transmits and clears the buffer.
•The scanner issues a low/high beep.
2. Scan a Code 39 bar code with a leading character other than a space.
•The scanner appends new decode data to buffered data.
•The scanner transmits and clears the buffer.
•The scanner signals that the buffer was transmitted with a low/high beep.
•Scanner transmits and clears the buffer.
Overfilling Transmission Buffer
The Code 39 buffer holds 200 characters. If the symbol just read results in an overflow of the transmission buffer:
•
The scanner indicates that the symbol was rejected by issuing three long, high beeps.
•
No transmission occurs. The data in the buffer is not affected.
Attempt to Transmit an Empty Buffer
If the symbol just read was the Transmit Buffer symbol and the Code 39 buffer is empty:
•
A short low/high/low beep signals that the buffer is empty.
•
No transmission occurs.
•
The buffer remains empty.
NOTE Because the Clear Buffer contains only the dash (minus) character, set the Code 39 length to include
length 1 before scanning this bar code.
Transmit Buffer
NOTE Because the Transmit Buffer contains only a plus (+) character, set the Code 39 length to include length 1
before scanning this bar code.
13 - 30 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Code 93
Enable/Disable Code 93
To enable or disable Code 93, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Set Lengths for Code 93
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s)
the code contains. Set lengths for Code 93 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific
range.
•
One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Code 93 symbols containing a selected length.
Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode
only Code 93 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 93 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4.
To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
•
Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Code 93 symbols containing either of two
selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For
example, to decode only those Code 93 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Code 93 - Two
Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan
Cancel on page D-3.
•
Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Code 93 symbol with a specific length range.
Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode
Code 93 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Code 93 - Length Within Range.
Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading zero). To correct an
error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
•
Any Length - Scan this option to decode Code 93 symbols containing any number of characters within the
scanner’s capability.
Enable Code 93
*Disable Code 93
Symbologies 13 - 31
Set Lengths for Code 93 (continued)
Code 93 - One Discrete Length
Code 93 - Two Discrete Lengths
Code 93 - Length Within Range
Code 93 - Any Length
13 - 32 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Code 11
Code 11
To enable or disable Code 11, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Set Lengths for Code 11
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s)
the code contains. Set lengths for Code 11 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific
range.
•
One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Code 11 symbols containing a selected length.
Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode
only Code 11 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 11 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4.
To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
•
Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Code 11 symbols containing either of two
selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For
example, to decode only those Code 11 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Code 11 - Two
Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan
Cancel on page D-3.
•
Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Code 11 symbol with a specific length range.
Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode
Code 11 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Code 11 - Length Within Range.
Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading zero). To correct an
error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
•
Any Length - Scan this option to decode Code 11 symbols containing any number of characters within the
scanner capability.
Enable Code 11
*Disable Code 11
Symbologies 13 - 33
Set Lengths for Code 11 (continued)
Code 11 - One Discrete Length
Code 11 - Two Discrete Lengths
Code 11 - Length Within Range
Code 11 - Any Length
13 - 34 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Code 11 Check Digit Verification
This feature allows the scanner to check the integrity of all Code 11 symbols to verify that the data complies with
the specified check digit algorithm. This selects the check digit mechanism for the decoded Code 11 bar code. The
options are to check for one check digit, check for two check digits, or disable the feature.
To enable this feature, scan the bar code below corresponding to the number of check digits encoded in your Code
11 symbols.
Transmit Code 11 Check Digits
This feature selects whether or not to transmit the Code 11 check digit(s).
*Disable
One Check Digit
Two Check Digits
Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s)
(Enable)
*Do Not Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s)
(Disable)
NOTE Code 11 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function.
Symbologies 13 - 35
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
Enable/Disable Interleaved 2 of 5
To enable or disable Interleaved 2 of 5, scan the appropriate bar code below, and select an Interleaved 2 of 5
length from the following pages.
Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s)
the code contains. Set lengths for I 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific
range.
•
One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length. Select
the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only I 2
of 5 symbols with 14 characters, scan I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. To correct
an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
•
Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two
selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For
example, to decode only those I 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select I 2 of 5 - Two
Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan
Cancel on page D-3.
•
Length Within Range - Select this option to decode an I 2 of 5 symbol with a specific length range.
Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode I 2 of
5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan I 2 of 5 - Length Within Range. Then scan 0,
4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading zero). To correct an error or change
the selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
•
Any Length - Scan this option to decode I 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the
scanner capability.
*Enable Interleaved 2 of 5
Disable Interleaved 2 of 5
NOTE Due to the construction of the I 2 of 5 symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the
code to be interpreted as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code. To prevent
this, select specific lengths (I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length - Two Discrete Lengths) for I 2 of 5
applications.
13 - 36 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 (continued)
I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length
I 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths
I 2 of 5 - Length Within Range
I 2 of 5 - Any Length
Symbologies 13 - 37
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification
When this feature is enabled, the scanner checks the integrity of all I 2 of 5 symbols to verify the data complies with
either the specified Uniform Symbology Specification (USS), or the Optical Product Code Council (OPCC) check
digit algorithm.
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit
Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit I 2 of 5 data with or without the check digit.
*Disable
USS Check Digit
OPCC Check Digit
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit
(Enable)
*Do Not Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit
(Disable)
13 - 38 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13
Enable this parameter to convert 14-character I 2 of 5 codes to EAN-13, and transmit to the host as EAN-13. To
accomplish this, the I 2 of 5 code must be enabled, and the code must have a leading zero and a valid EAN-13
check digit.
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13
(Enable)
*Do Not Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13
(Disable)
Symbologies 13 - 39
Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF)
Enable/Disable Discrete 2 of 5
To enable or disable Discrete 2 of 5, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5
he length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s)
the code contains. Set lengths for D 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific
range.
•
One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length.
Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode
only D 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters, scan D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4.
To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
•
Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two
selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For
example, to decode only those D 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select D 2 of 5 - Two
Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan
Cancel on page D-3.
•
Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a D 2 of 5 symbol with a specific length range.
Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode D 2
of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan D 2 of 5 - Length Within Range. Then
scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading zero). To correct an error or
change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
•
Any Length - Scan this option to decode D 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the
scanner capability.
Enable Discrete 2 of 5
*Disable Discrete 2 of 5
NOTE Due to the construction of the D 2 of 5 symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of
the code to be interpreted as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code. To
prevent this, select specific lengths (D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length - Two Discrete Lengths) for D 2 of
5 applications.
13 - 40 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 (continued)
D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length
D 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths
D 2 of 5 - Length Within Range
D 2 of 5 - Any Length
Symbologies 13 - 41
Chinese 2 of 5
Enable/Disable Chinese 2 of 5
To enable or disable Chinese 2 of 5, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Enable Chinese 2 of 5
*Disable Chinese 2 of 5
13 - 42 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Codabar (NW - 7)
Enable/Disable Codabar
To enable or disable Codabar, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Set Lengths for Codabar
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s)
the code contains. Set lengths for Codabar to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific
range.
•
One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Codabar symbols containing a selected length.
Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode
only Codabar symbols with 14 characters, scan Codabar - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4.
To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
•
Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Codabar symbols containing either of two
selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For
example, to decode only Codabar symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Codabar - Two
Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan
Cancel on page D-3.
•
Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Codabar symbol with a specific length range.
Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode
Codabar symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Codabar - Length Within Range.
Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading zero). To correct an
error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
•
Any Length - Scan this option to decode Codabar symbols containing any number of characters within the
scanner capability.
Enable Codabar
*Disable Codabar
Symbologies 13 - 43
Set Lengths for Codabar (continued).
Codabar - One Discrete Length
Codabar - Two Discrete Lengths
Codabar - Length Within Range
Codabar - Any Length
13 - 44 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
CLSI Editing
When enabled, this parameter strips the start and stop characters and inserts a space after the first, fifth, and tenth
characters of a 14-character Codabar symbol. Enable this feature if your host system requires this data format.
NOTIS Editing
When enabled, this parameter strips the start and stop characters from a decoded Codabar symbol. Enable this
feature if your host system requires this data format.
NOTE Symbol length does not include start and stop characters.
Enable CLSI Editing
*Disable CLSI Editing
Enable NOTIS Editing
*Disable NOTIS Editing
Symbologies 13 - 45
MSI
Enable/Disable MSI
To enable or disable MSI, scan the appropriate bar code below.
Set Lengths for MSI
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s)
the code contains. Set lengths for MSI to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range.
•
One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only MSI symbols containing a selected length. Select
the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only MSI
symbols with 14 characters, scan MSI - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. To correct an
error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
•
Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only MSI symbols containing either of two selected
lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to
decode only MSI symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select MSI - Two Discrete Lengths, then
scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
•
Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a MSI symbol with a specific length range. Select
lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode MSI
symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan MSI - Length Within Range. Then scan 0, 4,
1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading zero). To correct an error or change
the selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
•
Any Length - Scan this option to decode MSI symbols containing any number of characters within the
scanner capability.
Enable MSI
*Disable MSI
NOTE Due to the construction of the MSI symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the
code to be interpreted as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code. To prevent
this, select specific lengths (MSI - One Discrete Length - Two Discrete Lengths) for MSI applications..
13 - 46 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Set Lengths for MSI (continued)
MSI Check Digits
With MSI symbols, one check digit is mandatory and always verified by the reader. The second check digit is
optional. If the MSI codes include two check digits, scan the Two MSI Check Digits bar code to enable verification
of the second check digit.
See MSI Check Digit Algorithm on page 13-47 for the selection of second digit algorithms.
MSI - One Discrete Length
MSI - Two Discrete Lengths
MSI - Length Within Range
MSI - Any Length
*One MSI Check Digit
Two MSI Check Digits
Symbologies 13 - 47
Transmit MSI Check Digit(s)
Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit MSI data with or without the check digit.
MSI Check Digit Algorithm
Two algorithms are possible for the verification of the second MSI check digit. Select the bar code below
corresponding to the algorithm used to encode your check digit.
Transmit MSI Check Digit(s)
(Enable)
*Do Not Transmit MSI Check Digit(s)
(Disable)
MOD 10/MOD 11
*MOD 10/MOD 10
13 - 48 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
GS1 DataBar
The variants of GS1 DataBar are DataBar-14, DataBar Expanded and DataBar Limited. DataBar-14 and DataBar
Expanded include stacked versions. Scan the appropriate bar code below to enable or disable each variant of GS1
DataBar.
Enable GS1 DataBar-14
*Disable GS1 DataBar 14
Enable GS1 DataBar Limited
*Disable GS1 DataBar Limited
Enable GS1 DataBar Expanded
*Disable GS1 DataBar Expanded
Symbologies 13 - 49
Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN
This parameter only applies to DataBar-14 and DataBar Limited symbols not decoded as part of a Composite
symbol. Enable this to strip the leading '010' from DataBar-14 and DataBar Limited symbols encoding a single zero
as the first digit, and report the bar code as EAN-13.
For bar codes beginning with two or more zeros but not six zeros, this parameter strips the leading '0100' and
reports the bar code as UPC-A. The UPC-A Preamble parameter that transmits the system character and country
code applies to converted bar codes. Note that neither the system character nor the check digit can be stripped.
Enable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN
*Disable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN
13 - 50 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Symbology - Specific Security Levels
Redundancy Level
The scanner offers four levels of decode redundancy. Select higher redundancy levels for decreasing levels of bar
code quality. As redundancy levels increase, the scanner’s aggressiveness decreases.
Select the redundancy level appropriate for the bar code quality.
Redundancy Level 1
The following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded:
Redundancy Level 2
The following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded:
Redundancy Level 3
Code types other than the following must be successfully read twice before being decoded. The following codes
must be read three times:
Redundancy Level 4
The following code types must be successfully read three times before being decoded:
Code Type Code Length
Codabar 8 characters or less
MSI 4 characters or less
D 2 of 5 8 characters or less
I 2 of 5 8 characters or less
Code Type Code Length
All All
Code Type Code Length
MSI 4 characters or less
D 2 of 5 8 characters or less
I 2 of 5 8 characters or less
Codabar 8 characters or less
Code Type Code Length
All All
Symbologies 13 - 51
Redundancy Level (continued)
*Redundancy Level 1
Redundancy Level 2
Redundancy Level 3
Redundancy Level 4
13 - 52 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Security Level
The scanner offers four levels of decode security for delta bar codes, which include the Code 128 family,
UPC/EAN, and Code 93. Select increasing levels of security for decreasing levels of bar code quality. There is an
inverse relationship between security and scanner aggressiveness, so choose only that level of security necessary
for any given application.
•
Security Level 0: This default setting allows the scanner to operate in its most aggressive state, while
providing sufficient security in decoding most “in-spec” bar codes.
•
Security Level 1: Select this option if misdecodes occur. This security level should eliminate most
misdecodes.
•
Security Level 2: Select this option if Security level 1 fails to eliminate misdecodes.
•
Security Level 3: If Security Level 2 was selected and misdecodes still occur, select this security level. Be
advised, selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis-decoding severely out of spec bar codes.
Selecting this level of security significantly impairs the decoding ability of the scanner. If this level of security
is necessary, try to improve the quality of the bar codes.
*Security Level 0
Security Level 1
Security Level 2
Security Level 3
Symbologies 13 - 53
Bi-directional Redundancy
Enable Bi-directional Redundancy to add security to linear code type security levels. When enabled, a bar code
must be successfully scanned in both directions (forward and reverse) before reporting a good decode.
Symbology - Intercharacter Gap
The Code 39 and Codabar symbologies have an intercharacter gap that is customarily quite small. Due to various
bar code printing technologies, this gap may grow larger than the maximum size allowed, causing the scanner to
be unable to decode the symbol. If this problem is encountered, scan Large Intercharacter Gaps to tolerate
out-of-specification bar codes.
Enable Bi-directional Redundancy
*Disable Bi-directional Redundancy
*Normal Intercharacter Gaps
Large Intercharacter Gaps
13 - 54 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Chapter 14 Advanced Data Formatting
Introduction
Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) is a means of customizing data before transmission to the host device. Scan
data can be edited to suit particular requirements.
To implement ADF, scan a related series of bar codes, which begin on page 14-8, which allows programming the
scanner with Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) Rules.
Avoid using ADF formatting with bar codes containing more than 60 characters. To add a prefix or suffix value for
such bar codes, use Prefix/Suffix Values on page 5-13. Using ADF with longer bar codes transmits the bar code in
segments of length 252 or less (depending on the host selected), and applies the rule to each segment
Rules: Criteria Linked to Actions
ADF uses rules to customize data. These rules perform detailed actions when the data meets certain criteria. One
rule may consist of single or multiple criteria applied to single or multiple actions.
For instance, a data formatting rule could be:
Criteria: When scan data is Code 39, length 12, and data at the start position is the string “129”,
Actions: pad all sends with zeros to length 8,
send all data up to X,
send a space.
Scanning a Code 39 bar code of 1299X1559828 transmits the following: 00001299<space>. If you scan a Code 39
bar code of 1299X15598, this rule is ignored because the bar code did not meet the length criteria.
The rule specifies the editing conditions and requirements before data transmission occurs.
14 - 2 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Using ADF Bar Codes
When programming a rule, make sure the rule is logically correct. Plan ahead before scanning.
To program each data formatting rule:
•
Start the Rule. Scan the Begin New Rule bar code on page 14-8.
•
Specify Criteria. Scan the bar codes for all pertinent criteria. Criteria can include code type (e.g., Code 128),
code length, or data that contains a specific character string (e.g., the digits “129”). See Criteria on page
14-11.
•
Select Actions. Scan all actions related to, or affecting, these criteria. The actions of a rule specify how to
format the data for transmission. See Actions on page 14-24.
•
Save the Rule. Scan the Save Rule bar code on page 14-8. This places the rule in the “top” position in the
rule buffer.
•
To correct any errors, see Erase on page 14-9 to erase criteria, actions, and entire rules.
ADF Bar Code Menu Example
This section provides an example of how to enter and use ADF rules for scan data.
An auto parts distribution center wants to encode manufacturer ID, part number, and destination code into their
own Code 128 bar codes. The distribution center also has products that carry UPC bar codes, placed there by the
manufacturer. The Code 128 bar codes have the following format:
MMMMMPPPPPDD
Where: M = Manufacturer ID
P = Part Number
D = Destination Code
The distribution center uses a PC with dedicated control characters for manufacturer ID <CTRL M>, part number
<CTRL P>, and destination code <CTRL D>. At this center the UPC data is treated as manufacturer ID code.
The following rules need to be entered:
When scanning data of code type Code 128, send the next 5 characters, send the manufacturer ID key
<CTRL M>, send the next 5 characters, send the part number key <CTRL P>, send the next 2 characters,
send the destination code key <CTRL D>.
When scanning data of code type UPC/EAN, send all data, send the manufacturer ID key <CTRL M>.
To enter these rules, see the following steps.
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 3
Rule 1: The Code 128 Scanning Rule
Step Bar Code On Page Beep Indication
1 Begin New Rule 14-8 High High
2 Code 128 14-11 High High
3 Send next 5 characters 14-25 High High
4 Send <CTRL M> 14-45 High High
5 Send next 5 characters 14-25 High High
6 Send <CTRL P> 14-45 High High
7 Send next 2 characters 14-24 High High
8 Send <CTRL D> 14-44 High High
9 Save Rule 14-8 High Low High Low
Rule 2: The UPC Scanning Rule
Step Bar Code On Page Beep Indication
1 Begin New Rule 14-8 High High
2 UPC/EAN 14-13 High High
3 Send all remaining data 14-24 High High
4 Send <CTRL M> 14-45 High High
5 Save Rule 14-8 High Low High Low
To correct any errors made while entering this rule, scan the Quit Entering Rules bar code on page 14-9. If you
already saved the rule, scan the Erase Previously Saved Rule bar code on page 14-9.
Alternate Rule Sets
You can group ADF rules into one of four alternate sets which you can turn on and off when needed. This is useful
to format the same message in different ways. For example, a Code 128 bar code contains the following
information:
Class (2 digits), Stock Number (8) digits, Price (5 digits)
The bar code might look like this:
245671243701500
where:
Class = 24
Stock Number = 56712437
Price = 01500
Ordinarily, data is sent as follows:
24 (class key)
56712437 (stock key)
01500 (enter key)
But, when there is a sale, send only the following:
24 (class key)
56712437 (stock key)
14 - 4 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
and the cashier keys the price manually.
To implement this, first enter an ADF rule that applies to the normal situation, such as:
Scan Rule Belongs to Set 1. When scanning a bar code of length 15, send the next 2 characters, send the class
key, send the next 8 characters, send the stock key, send the data that remains, send the Enter key.
The “sale” rule may look like this:
Scan Rule Belongs to Set 2. When scanning a bar code of length 15, send the next 2 characters, send the class
key, send the next 8 characters, send the stock key.
To switch between the two sets of rules, program a “switching rule” that specifies what type of bar code to scan to
switch between the rule sets. For example, in the case of the “sale” rule above, the rule programmer wants the
cashier to scan the bar code “M” before a sale. To do this, a rule can be entered as follows:
When scanning a bar code of length 1 that begins with “M”, select rule set number 1.
Program another rule to switch back.
When scanning a bar code of length 1 that begins with “N”, turn off rule set number 1.
Or include the switching back to normal rules in the “sale” rule:
When scanning a bar code of length 15, send the next 2 characters, send the class key, send the next 8
characters, send the stock key, turn off rule set 1.
For optimal results, scan the Disable All Rule Sets bar code on page 14-10 after programming a rule belonging to
an alternate rule set.
In addition to enabling and disabling rule sets within the rules, enable or disable them by scanning the appropriate
bar codes on page 14-10.
Rules Hierarchy (in Bar Codes)
The order of programming individual rules is important.Program the most general rule first.
All programmed rules are stored in a buffer. As they are programmed, they are stored at the “top” of a rules list. If
you create three rules, the list is configured as follows:
Third Rule
Second Rule
First Rule
When you scan data, the rules list is checked from top to bottom to determine if the criteria matches (and therefore,
if the actions occur). Input is modified into the data format specified by the first matching set of criteria it finds. Be
sure to program the most general rule first.
For example, if the THIRD rule states:
When scanning a bar code of any length, send all data, then send the ENTER key.
And the SECOND rule states:
When scanning a Code 128 bar code of length 12, send the first four characters, then send the ENTER key,
then send all remaining data.
and you scan a Code 128 bar code of length 12, the THIRD rule applies, and the SECOND rule appears to not
function.
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 5
Note that using the standard data editing functions also creates ADF rules. Scan options are entered as ADF rules,
and the hierarchy mentioned above also applies to them. For the digital scanner, this applies to prefix/suffix
programming in the parameter Scan Data Transmission Format on page 5-13.
These rules reside in the same “rule list” as ADF Rules, so the order you create them is also important.
Default Rules
Every unit has a default rule to send all scan data. Units with custom software may have one or more default rules
burned in. The rules hierarchy checks user programmable rules first, then the default rules. Disable default rules by
entering the following general rule in the user programmable buffer:
When receiving scan data, send all data.
Since this rule always applies, ADF never applies the default rules.
14 - 6 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
ADF Bar Codes
Table 14-1 lists the bar codes available through ADF.
Table 14-1
ADF Bar Codes
Parameter Page
Number
Special Commands
14-8
Pause Duration
14-8
Begin New Rule
14-8
Save Rule
14-8
Erase
14-9
Quit Entering Rules
14-9
Disable Rule Set
14-10
Criteria
14-11
Code Types
14-11
Code Lengths
14-15
1 Character
-
6 Characters
14-15
7 Characters
-
13 Characters
14-16
14 Characters
-
20 Characters
14-17
21 Characters
-
27 Characters
14-18
28 Characters
-
30 Characters
14-19
Specific String at Start
14-19
Specific String, Any Location
14-20
Any Message OK
14-20
Numeric Keypad
14-21
Rule Belongs To Set
14-23
Actions
14-24
Send Data
14-24
Send Data Up To Character
14-24
Send Next Character
14-24
Send All Data That Remains
14-24
Send Next 2 Characters
-
Send Next 20 Characters
14-24
Move Cursor
14-28
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 7
Send Pause
14-28
Skip Ahead
14-29
Skip Back
14-30
Send Preset Value
14-32
Remove All Spaces
14-32
Crunch All Spaces
14-32
Stop Space Removal
14-32
Remove Leading Zeros
14-33
Stop Zero Removal
14-33
Pad Data with Spaces
14-34
Pad Data with Zeros
14-38
Beeps
14-43
Control Characters
14-43
Keyboard Characters
14-48
Send ALT Characters
14-61
Send Keypad Characters
14-67
Send Function Key
14-72
Send F1 Key
-
Send F24 Key
14-72
Send PF1 Key
-
Send PF30 Key
14-75
Send Right Control Key
14-79
Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters
14-80
Send GUI 0
-
Send GUI 9
14-80
Send GUI A
-
Send GUI Z
14-81
Turn On/Off Rule Sets
14-85
Alphanumeric Keyboard
14-87
Space
-
`
14-87
0
-
9
14-91
A
-
Z
14-92
Cancel
14-96
Table 14-1
ADF Bar Codes (Continued)
Parameter Page
Number
14 - 8 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Special Commands
Pause Duration
Use this parameter, along with Send Pause on page 14-28, to insert a pause in the data transmission. Set the
pause by scanning a two-digit number (i.e., two bar codes) from Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes in 0.1 second
intervals. For example, scanning bar codes 0 and 1 inserts a 0.1 second pause; 0 and 5 inserts a 0.5 second delay.
To correct an error or change a selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
Pause Duration
Begin New Rule
Scan the bar code below to start entering a new rule
.
Begin New Rule
Save Rule
Scan the bar code below to save the rule.
Save Rule
End of Message
14-96
a
-
z
14-96
{
-
~
14-100
Table 14-1
ADF Bar Codes (Continued)
Parameter Page
Number
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 9
Erase
Use these bar codes to erase criteria, actions, or rules.
Quit Entering Rules
Scan the bar code below to quit entering rules.
Quit Entering Rules
Erase Criteria And Start Again
Erase Actions And Start Again
Erase Previously Saved Rule
Erase All Rules
14 - 10 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Disable Rule Set
Use these bar codes to disable rule sets.
Disable Rule Set 1
Disable Rule Set 2
Disable Rule Set 3
Disable Rule Set 4
Disable All Rule Sets
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 11
Criteria
Code Types
Scan the bar codes for all code to be affected by the rule. Scan the codes in succession, prior to selecting other
criteria. To select all code types, do not scan any code type.
Code 39
Codabar
GS1 DataBar-14
GS1 DataBar Limited
GS1 DataBar Expanded
Code 128
D 2 OF 5
14 - 12 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Code Types (continued)
IATA 2 OF 5
I 2 OF 5
Code 93
UPC-A
UPC-E
EAN-8
EAN-13
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 13
Code Types (continued)
MSI
GS1-128
UPC-E1
Bookland EAN
Trioptic Code 39
Code 11
Code 32
14 - 14 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Code Types (continued)
ISBT 128
Coupon Code
TLC 39
UPC/EAN Composites
GS1 DataBar and EAN128 Composites
NOTE When selecting composite bar codes, enable AIM IDs if parsing UPC or EAN composite data, or data from
an application that uses symbol separators.
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 15
Code Lengths
Scan these bar codes to define the number of characters the selected code type must contain. Select one length
per rule only. Do not select any code length to select code types of any length.
1 Character
2 Characters
3 Characters
4 Characters
5 Characters
6 Characters
14 - 16 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Code Lengths (continued)
7 Characters
8 Characters
9 Characters
10 Characters
11 Characters
12 Characters
13 Characters
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 17
Code Lengths (continued)
14 Characters
15 Characters
16 Characters
17 Characters
18 Characters
19 Characters
20 Characters
14 - 18 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Code Lengths (continued)
21 Characters
22 Characters
23 Characters
24 Characters
25 Characters
26 Characters
27 Characters
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 19
Message Containing A Specific Data String
Use this feature to select whether the formatting affects data that begins with a specific character or data string, or
contains a specific character or data string.
There are 4 features:
•
Specific String at Start
•
Specific String, Any Location
•
Any Message OK
•
Rule Belongs to Set
Specific String at Start
1. Scan the following bar code.
2. Scan the bar codes representing the desired character or characters (up to a total of 8) using the Alphanumeric
Keyboard on page 14-87.
3. Scan End of Message bar code on page 14-96.
Specific String At Start
Code Lengths (continued)
28 Characters
29 Characters
30 Characters
14 - 20 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Specific String, Any Location
1. Scan the following bar code.
2. Enter a location by scanning a two-digit number representing the position (use a leading “zero” if necessary)
using the Numeric Keypad on page 14-21.
3. Scan the bar codes representing the desired character or characters (up to a total of 8) using the Alphanumeric
Keyboard on page 14-87.
4. Scan End of Message bar code on page 14-96.
Specific String Any Location
Any Message OK
Do not scan any bar code to format all selected code types, regardless of information contained.
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 21
Numeric Keypad
Do not confuse bar codes on this page with those on the alphanumeric keyboard.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
14 - 22 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Numeric Keypad (continued)
7
8
9
Cancel
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 23
Rule Belongs To Set
Select the set to which a rule belongs. There are four possible rule sets. See Alternate Rule Sets on page 14-3 for
more information about rule sets.
Rule Belongs To Set 1
Rule Belongs To Set 2
Rule Belongs To Set 3
Rule Belongs To Set 4
14 - 24 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Actions
Select how to format the data for transmission.
Send Data
Send all data that remains, send all data up to a specific character selected from the Alphanumeric Keyboard on
page 14-87, or send the next X characters. Note that only bar codes for Send Next 1 to 20 appear here, and can
be scanned multiple times to send values greater then 20. For instance, to send the next 28 characters, scan Send
Next 20 Characters, then Send Next 8 Characters.
Send Data Up To Character
Send All Data That Remains
Send Next Character
Send Next 2 Characters
Send Next 3 Characters
Send Next 4 Characters
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 25
Send Data (continued)
Send Next 5 Characters
Send Next 6 Characters
Send Next 7 Characters
Send Next 8 Characters
Send Next 9 Characters
Send Next 10 Characters
Send Next 11 Characters
14 - 26 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Send Data (continued)
Send Next 12 Characters
Send Next 13 Characters
Send Next 14 Characters
Send Next 15 Characters
Send Next 16 Characters
Send Next 17 Characters
Send Next 18 Characters
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 27
Setup Field(s)
Send Data (continued)
Send Next 19 Characters
Send Next 20 Characters
Table 14-2
Setup Field(s) Definitions
Parameter Description Page
Move Cursor
Move Cursor To a Character Scan the
Move Cursor To Character on page 14-28
, then any
printable ASCII character from the
Alphanumeric Keyboard on page
14-87
. This moves the cursor to the position after the matching
character. If the character is not there, the rule fails and ADF tries the
next rule.
14-28
Move Cursor to Start of Data Scan this bar code to move the cursor to the beginning of the data. 14-28
Move Cursor Past a Character This action moves the cursor past all sequential occurrences of a
selected character. For example, if the selected character is ‘A’, then
the cursor moves past ‘A’, ‘AA’, ‘AAA’, etc. Scan the
Move Cursor Past
Character on page 14-28
, then select a character from the
Alphanumeric Keyboard on page 14-87
. If the character is not there,
the cursor does not move (i.e., has no effect).
14-28
Skip Ahead “N” Characters Scan one of these bar codes to select the number of positions ahead
to move the cursor. 14-29
Skip Back “N” Characters Scan one of these bar codes to select the number of positions back to
move the cursor. 14-30
Send Preset Value Send Values 1 through 6 by scanning the appropriate bar code. Set
these values using the prefix/suffix values in
Table 7-4 on page 7-18
.
Value 1 = Scan Suffix
Value 2 = Scan Prefix
Values 3-6 are not applicable
14-30
14 - 28 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Move Cursor
Scan a bar code below to move the cursor in relation to a specified character. Then enter a character by scanning
a bar code from the Alphanumeric Keyboard on page 14-87.
Send Pause
Scan the bar code below to insert a pause in the transmission of data. See Pause Duration on page 14-8 to set the
length of this pause.
NOTE If there is no match and the rule fails, the next rule is checked.
Move Cursor To Character
Move Cursor To Start
Move Cursor Past Character
Send Pause
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 29
Skip Ahead
Use the following bar codes to skip ahead characters.
Skip Ahead 1 Character
Skip Ahead 2 Characters
Skip Ahead 3 Characters
Skip Ahead 4 Characters
Skip Ahead 5 Characters
Skip Ahead 6 Characters
Skip Ahead 7 Characters
14 - 30 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Skip Back
Use the following bar codes to skip back characters.
Skip Ahead (continued)
Skip Ahead 8 Characters
Skip Ahead 9 Characters
Skip Ahead 10 Characters
Skip Back 1 Character
Skip Back 2 Characters
Skip Back 3 Characters
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 31
Skip Back (continued)
Skip Back 4 Characters
Skip Back 5 Characters
Skip Back 6 Characters
Skip Back 7 Characters
Skip Back 8 Characters
Skip Back 9 Characters
Skip Back 10 Characters
14 - 32 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Send Preset Value
Use these bar codes to send preset values. See Prefix/Suffix Values on page 5-13 to set these values.
Modify Data
Modify data as described below. The following actions work for all send commands that follow it within a rule.
Programming pad zeros to length 6, send next 3 characters, stop padding, send next 5 characters, adds three
zeros to the first send, and the next send is unaffected by the padding. These options do not apply to the Send
Keystroke or Send Preset Value options.
Remove All Spaces
To remove all spaces in the send commands that follow, scan the bar code below.
Remove All Spaces
Crunch All Spaces
To leave one space between words, scan the bar code below. This also removes all leading and trailing spaces.
Crunch All Spaces
Stop Space Removal
Scan the bar code below to disable space removal.
Stop Space Removal
Send Prefix
Send Suffix
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 33
Remove Leading Zeros
Scan the bar code below to remove all leading zeros.
Remove Leading Zeros
Stop Zero Removal
Scan the bar code below to disable the removal of zeros.
Stop Zero Removal
14 - 34 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Pad Data with Spaces
To pad data to the left, scan the bar code containing the desired number of spaces. Use Send commands to
activate this parameter.
Pad Spaces To Length 1
Pad Spaces To Length 2
Pad Spaces To Length 3
Pad Spaces To Length 4
Pad Spaces To Length 5
Pad Spaces To Length 6
Pad Spaces To Length 7
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 35
Pad Data with Spaces (continued)
Pad Spaces To Length 8
Pad Spaces To Length 9
Pad Spaces To Length 10
Pad Spaces To Length 11
Pad Spaces To Length 12
Pad Spaces To Length 13
Pad Spaces To Length 14
14 - 36 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Pad Data with Spaces (continued)
Pad Spaces To Length 15
Pad Spaces To Length 16
Pad Spaces To Length 17
Pad Spaces To Length 18
Pad Spaces To Length 19
Pad Spaces To Length 20
Pad Spaces To Length 21
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 37
Pad Data with Spaces (continued)
Pad Spaces To Length 22
Pad Spaces To Length 23
Pad Spaces To Length 24
Pad Spaces To Length 25
Pad Spaces To Length 26
Pad Spaces To Length 27
Pad Spaces To Length 28
14 - 38 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Pad Data with Zeros
To pad data to the left, scan the bar code containing the desired number of zeros. Use Send commands to activate
this parameter.
Pad Data with Spaces (continued)
Pad Spaces To Length 29
Pad Spaces To Length 30
Stop Pad Spaces
Pad Zeros To Length 1
Pad Zeros To Length 2
Pad Zeros To Length 3
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 39
Pad Data with Zeros (continued)
Pad Zeros To Length 4
Pad Zeros To Length 5
Pad Zeros To Length 6
Pad Zeros To Length 7
Pad Zeros To Length 8
Pad Zeros To Length 9
Pad Zeros To Length 10
14 - 40 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Pad Data with Zeros (continued)
Pad Zeros To Length 11
Pad Zeros To Length 12
Pad Zeros To Length 13
Pad Zeros To Length 14
Pad Zeros To Length 15
Pad Zeros To Length 16
Pad Zeros To Length 17
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 41
Pad Data with Zeros (continued)
Pad Zeros To Length 18
Pad Zeros To Length 19
Pad Zeros To Length 20
Pad Zeros To Length 21
Pad Zeros To Length 22
Pad Zeros To Length 23
Pad Zeros To Length 24
14 - 42 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Pad Data with Zeros (continued)
Pad Zeros To Length 25
Pad Zeros To Length 26
Pad Zeros To Length 27
Pad Zeros To Length 28
Pad Zeros To Length 29
Pad Zeros To Length 30
Stop Pad Zeros
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 43
Beeps
Select a beep sequence for each ADF rule.
Send Keystroke (Control Characters and Keyboard Characters)
Control Characters
Scan a Send bar code for the keystroke to send.
Beep Once
Beep Twice
Beep Three Times
Send Control 2
Send Control A
Send Control B
14 - 44 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Control Characters (continued)
Send Control C
Send Control D
Send Control E
Send Control F
Send Control G
Send Control H
Send Control I
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 45
Control Characters (continued)
Send Control J
Send Control K
Send Control L
Send Control M
Send Control N
Send Control O
Send Control P
14 - 46 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Control Characters (continued)
Send Control Q
Send Control R
Send Control S
Send Control T
Send Control U
Send Control V
Send Control W
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 47
Control Characters (continued)
Send Control X
Send Control Y
Send Control Z
Send Control [
Send Control \
Send Control ]
14 - 48 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Keyboard Characters
Scan a Send bar code for the keyboard characters to send.
Control Characters (continued)
Send Control 6
Send Control -
Send Space
Send !
Send “
Send #
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 49
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send $
Send %
Send &
Send ‘
Send (
Send )
Send *
14 - 50 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send +
Send ,
Send -
Send .
Send /
Send 0
Send 1
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 51
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send 2
Send 3
Send 4
Send 5
Send 6
Send 7
Send 8
14 - 52 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send 9
Send :
Send ;
Send <
Send =
Send >
Send ?
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 53
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send @
Send A
Send B
Send C
Send D
Send E
Send F
14 - 54 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send G
Send H
Send I
Send J
Send K
Send L
Send M
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 55
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send N
Send O
Send P
Send Q
Send R
Send S
Send T
14 - 56 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send U
Send V
Send W
Send X
Send Y
Send Z
Send [
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 57
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send \
Send ]
Send ^
Send _
Send `
Send a
Send b
14 - 58 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send c
Send d
Send e
Send f
Send g
Send h
Send i
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 59
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send j
Send k
Send l
Send m
Send n
Send o
Send p
14 - 60 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send q
Send r
Send s
Send t
Send u
Send v
Send w
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 61
Send ALT Characters
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send x
Send y
Send z
Send {
Send |
Send }
Send ~
14 - 62 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Send Alt 2
Send Alt A
Send Alt B
Send Alt C
Send Alt D
Send Alt E
Send Alt F
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 63
Send ALT Characters (continued)
Send Alt G
Send Alt H
Send Alt I
Send Alt J
Send Alt K
Send Alt L
Send Alt M
14 - 64 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Send ALT Characters (continued)
Send Alt N
Send Alt O
Send Alt P
Send Alt Q
Send Alt R
Send Alt S
Send Alt T
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 65
Send ALT Characters (continued)
Send Alt U
Send Alt V
Send Alt W
Send Alt X
Send Alt Y
Send Alt Z
Send Alt [
14 - 66 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Send ALT Characters (continued)
Send Alt \
Send Alt ]
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 67
Send Keypad Characters
Send Keypad *
Send Keypad +
Send Keypad -
Send Keypad .
Send Keypad /
Send Keypad 0
Send Keypad 1
14 - 68 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Send Keypad Characters (continued)
Send Keypad 2
Send Keypad 3
Send Keypad 4
Send Keypad 5
Send Keypad 6
Send Keypad 7
Send Keypad 8
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 69
Send Keypad Characters (continued)
Send Keypad 9
Send Keypad Enter
Send Keypad Numlock
Send Break Key
Send Delete Key
Send Page Up Key
Send End Key
14 - 70 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Send Keypad Characters (continued)
Send Page Down Key
Send Pause Key
Send Scroll Lock Key
Send Backspace Key
Send Tab Key
Send Print Screen Key
Send Insert Key
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 71
Send Keypad Characters (continued)
Send Home Key
Send Enter Key
Send Escape Key
Send Up Arrow Key
Send Down Arrow Key
Send Left Arrow Key
Send Right Arrow Key
14 - 72 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Send Function Key
Send F1 Key
Send F2 Key
Send F3 Key
Send F4 Key
Send F5 Key
Send F6 Key
Send F7 Key
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 73
Send Function Key (continued)
Send F8 Key
Send F9 Key
Send F10 Key
Send F11 Key
Send F12 Key
Send F13 Key
Send F14 Key
14 - 74 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Send Function Key (continued)
Send F15 Key
Send F16 Key
Send F17 Key
Send F18 Key
Send F19 Key
Send F20 Key
Send F21 Key
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 75
Send Function Key (continued)
Send F22 Key
Send F23 Key
Send F24 Key
Send PF1 Key
Send PF2 Key
Send PF3 Key
Send PF4 Key
14 - 76 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Send Function Key (continued)
Send PF5 Key
Send PF6 Key
Send PF7 Key
Send PF8 Key
Send PF9 Key
Send PF10 Key
Send PF11 Key
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 77
Send Function Key (continued)
Send PF12 Key
Send PF13 Key
Send PF14 Key
Send PF15 Key
Send PF16 Key
Send PF17 Key
Send PF18 Key
14 - 78 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Send Function Key (continued)
Send PF19 Key
Send PF20 Key
Send PF21 Key
Send PF22 Key
Send PF23 Key
Send PF24 Key
Send PF25 Key
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 79
Send Right Control Key
The “Send Right Control Key” action will send a tap (press and release) of the Right Control Key.
Send Right Control Key
Send Function Key (continued)
Send PF26 Key
Send PF27 Key
Send PF28 Key
Send PF29 Key
Send PF30 Key
14 - 80 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters
The Send Graphic User Interface Character actions taps the specified key while holding the System Dependent
Graphic User Interface (GUI) Key. The definition of the Graphic User Interface key depends on the attached
system.
Send GUI 0
Send GUI 1
Send GUI 2
Send GUI 3
Send GUI 4
Send GUI 5
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 81
Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (continued)
Send GUI 6
Send GUI 7
Send GUI 8
Send GUI 9
Send GUI A
Send GUI B
Send GUI C
14 - 82 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (continued)
Send GUI D
Send GUI E
Send GUI F
Send GUI G
Send GUI H
Send GUI I
Send GUI J
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 83
Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (continued)
Send GUI K
Send GUI L
Send GUI M
Send GUI N
Send GUI O
Send GUI P
Send GUI Q
14 - 84 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (continued)
Send GUI R
Send GUI S
Send GUI T
Send GUI U
Send GUI V
Send GUI W
Send GUI X
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 85
Turn On/Off Rule Sets
Use these bar codes to turn rule sets on and off.
Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (continued)
Send GUI Y
Send GUI Z
Turn On Rule Set 1
Turn On Rule Set 2
Turn On Rule Set 3
Turn On Rule Set 4
14 - 86 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Turn On/Off Rule Sets (continued)
Use these bar codes to turn rule sets on and off.
Turn Off Rule Set 1
Turn Off Rule Set 2
Turn Off Rule Set 3
Turn Off Rule Set 4
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 87
Alphanumeric Keyboard
Space
#
$
%
*
(Single Quote)
+
-
(Dash)
14 - 88 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
.
,
(Comma)
/
!
“
&
‘
(
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 89
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
)
:
;
<
=
>
?
14 - 90 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
@
[
\
]
^
_
(Underscore)
`
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 91
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
NOTEDo not confuse the numeric bar codes below with those on the numeric keypad.
0
1
2
3
4
5
14 - 92 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 93
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
14 - 94 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 95
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
14 - 96 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
Y
Z
Cancel
End of Message
a
b
c
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 97
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
14 - 98 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
Advanced Data Formatting 14 - 99
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
14 - 100Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
y
z
{
|
}
~
Appendix A Standard Default Parameters
Table A-1
Standard Default Parameters Table
Parameter Default Page
Number
Radio Communications
Bluetooth Host Cradle Host
4-5
Country Keyboard Types (Country Code) North American
4-8
HID Keyboard Keystroke Delay No Delay (0 msec)
4-10
CAPS Lock Override Disable
4-10
Ignore Unknown Characters Enable
4-11
Emulate Keypad Disable
4-11
Keyboard FN1 Substitution Disable
4-12
Function Key Mapping Disable
4-12
Convert Case No Case Conversion
4-13
Simulated Caps Lock Disable
4-13
Beep on Reconnect Attempt Disable
4-14
Reconnect Attempt Interval 30 sec
4-15
Modes of Operation (Point-to-Point/Multipoint-to-Point) Point-to-Point
4-18
Parameter Broadcast (Cradle Host Only) Enable
4-19
Pairing Modes Unlocked
4-20
Pairing on Contacts Disable
4-21
Connection Maintenance Interval 15 min
4-24
1
User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
A - 2 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Remote Address (All Bluetooth Host Modes) No Address
4-26
Authentication Disable
4-25
Encryption Disable
4-27
User Preferences
Beeper Tone Medium
5-4
Beeper Volume High
5-4
Beep on Insertion Enabled
5-5
Intellistand Idle Timeout 15 min
5-5
Power Mode Reduced Power Mode
5-7
Time Delay to Reduced Power Mode 1 sec
5-8
Scan Pattern Multi-line Always Raster
5-9
Scan Line Width Full Width
5-10
Laser On Time 3.0 sec
5-10
Beep After Good Decode Enable
5-11
Transmit Code ID Character None
5-12
Prefix Value 7013 <CR><LF>
5-13
Suffix Value 7013 <CR><LF>
5-13
Scan Data Transmission Format Data As Is
5-13
FN1 Substitution Values Set
5-15
Transmit “No Read” Message Disable
5-15
Synapse Interface Standard
5-16
Batch Mode Normal (Do Not Batch Data)
5-17
Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters
Keyboard Wedge Host Type IBM PC/AT& IBM PC
Compatibles
1
6-4
Country Types (Country Codes) North American
6-5
Ignore Unknown Characters Send
6-6
Keystroke Delay No Delay
6-7
Table A-1
Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)
Parameter Default Page
Number
1
User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
Standard Default Parameters A - 3
Intra-Keystroke Delay Disable
6-7
Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation Disable
6-8
Caps Lock On Disable
6-8
Caps Lock Override Disable
6-9
Convert Wedge Data No Convert
6-9
Function Key Mapping Disable
6-10
FN1 Substitution Disable
6-10
Send and Make Break Send
6-11
RS-232 Host Parameters
RS-232 Host Types Standard
7-6
Baud Rate 9600
7-7
Parity Type None
7-8
Stop Bit Select 1 Stop Bit
7-9
Data Bits (ASCII Format) 8-Bit
7-9
Check Receive Errors Enable
7-10
Hardware Handshaking None
7-10
Software Handshaking None
7-12
Host Serial Response Time-out 2 sec
7-14
RTS Line State Low RTS
7-15
Beep on <BEL> Disable
7-15
Intercharacter Delay 0 msec
7-16
Nixdorf Beep/LED Options Normal Operation
7-17
Ignore Unknown Characters Send Bar Code
7-17
USB Host Parameters
USB Device Type HID Keyboard Emulation
8-4
USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) North American
8-5
USB Keystroke Delay No Delay
8-7
USB CAPS Lock Override Disable
8-7
Table A-1
Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)
Parameter Default Page
Number
1
User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
A - 4 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
USB Ignore Unknown Characters Send
8-8
Emulate Keypad Disable
8-8
USB FN1 Substitution Disable
8-9
Function Key Mapping Disable
8-9
Simulated Caps Lock Disable
8-10
Convert Case No Case Conversion
8-10
Ignore Beep Disable
8-11
Ignore Bar Code Configuration Disable
8-11
IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters
Port Address None Selected
9-4
Convert Unknown to Code 39 Disable
9-5
Ignore Beep Disable
9-5
Ignore Bar Code Configuration Disable
9-6
Wand Emulation Host Parameters
Wand Emulation Host Types Symbol OmniLink Interface
Controller
1
10-4
Leading Margin 80 msec
10-5
Polarity Bar High/Margin Low
10-6
Ignore Unknown Characters Send
10-6
Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Disable
10-7
Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII Disable
10-8
Scanner Emulation
Beep Style Beep on Successful Transmit
11-4
Parameter Pass-Through Parameter Process and Pass
Through
11-5
Convert Newer Code Types Convert Newer Code Types
11-6
Module Width 20 µs
11-6
Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Do Not Convert Bar Codes to
Code 39
11-7
Table A-1
Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)
Parameter Default Page
Number
1
User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
Standard Default Parameters A - 5
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Disable
11-7
Transmission Timeout 3 sec
11-8
Ignore Unknown Characters Ignore Unknown Characters
11-9
Leading Margin 2 ms
11-9
Check for Decode LED Check for Decode LED
11-10
123Scan Configuration Tool
123Scan Configuration None
1
12-2
UPC/EAN
UPC-A Enable
13-5
UPC-E Enable
13-5
UPC-E1 Disable
13-6
EAN-8/JAN 8 Enable
13-6
EAN-13/JAN 13 Enable
13-6
Bookland EAN Disable
13-8
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (2 and 5 digits) Ignore
13-9
User-Programmable Supplementals
13-12
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy 7
13-12
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit Enable
13-13
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit Enable
13-13
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit Enable
13-14
UPC-A Preamble System Character
13-14
UPC-E Preamble System Character
13-15
UPC-E1 Preamble System Character
13-16
Convert UPC-E to A Disable
13-17
Convert UPC-E1 to A Disable
13-17
EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend Disable
13-18
Bookland ISBN Format ISBN-10
13-19
UCC Coupon Extended Code Disable
13-20
Table A-1
Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)
Parameter Default Page
Number
1
User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
A - 6 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Code 128
Code 128 Enable
13-21
GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128) Enable
13-21
ISBT 128 (non-concatenated) Enable
13-22
Code 39
Code 39 Enable
13-23
Trioptic Code 39 Disable
13-23
Convert Code 39 to Code 32 (Italian Pharmacy Code) Disable
13-24
Code 32 Prefix Disable
13-24
Set Length(s) for Code 39 2 to 55
13-25
Code 39 Check Digit Verification Disable
13-26
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit Disable
13-26
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Disable
13-27
Buffer Code 39 Disable
13-27
Code 93
Code 93 Disable
13-30
Set Length(s) for Code 93 4 to 55
13-30
Code 11
Code 11 Disable
13-32
Set Lengths for Code 11 4 to 55
13-32
Code 11 Check Digit Verification Disable
13-34
Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) Disable
13-34
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) Enable
13-35
Set Lengths for I 2 of 5 14
13-35
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification Disable
13-37
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit Disable
13-37
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN 13 Disable
13-38
Table A-1
Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)
Parameter Default Page
Number
1
User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
Standard Default Parameters A - 7
Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF)
Discrete 2 of 5 Disable
13-39
Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5 12
13-39
Chinese 2 of 5
Enable/Disable Chinese 2 of 5 Disable
13-41
Codabar (NW - 7)
Codabar Disable
13-42
Set Lengths for Codabar 5 to 55
13-42
CLSI Editing Disable
13-44
NOTIS Editing Disable
13-44
MSI
MSI Disable
13-45
Set Length(s) for MSI 2 to 55
13-45
MSI Check Digits One
13-46
Transmit MSI Check Digit Disable
13-47
MSI Check Digit Algorithm Mod 10/Mod 10
13-47
GS1 DataBar
GS1 DataBar-14 Disable
13-48
GS1 DataBar Limited Disable
13-48
GS1 DataBar Expanded Disable
13-48
Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN Disable
13-49
Symbology - Specific Security Levels
Redundancy Level 1
13-50
Security Levels 0
13-52
Bi-directional Redundancy Disable
13-53
Table A-1
Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)
Parameter Default Page
Number
1
User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
A - 8 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Appendix B Programming Reference
Symbol Code Identifiers
Table B-1
Symbol Code Characters
Code Character Code Type
A UPC/EAN
B Code 39, Code 39 Full ASCII, Code 32
C Codabar
D Code 128, ISBT 128
E Code 93
F Interleaved 2 of 5
G Discrete 2 of 5, or Discrete 2 of 5 IATA
H Code 11
JMSI
K GS1-128
L Bookland EAN
M Trioptic Code 39
N Coupon Code
R GS1 DataBar Family
U Chinese 2 of 5
B - 2 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
AIM Code Identifiers
Each AIM Code Identifier contains the three-character string ]cm where:
] = Flag Character (ASCII 93)
c = Code Character (see Table B-2)
m = Modifier Character (see Table B-3)
Table B-2
Aim Code Characters
Code Character Code Type
A Code 39, Code 39 Full ASCII, Code 32
C Code 128 (all variants), Coupon (Code 128 portion)
E UPC/EAN, Coupon (UPC portion)
eGS1 DataBar Family
F Codabar
G Code 93
H Code 11
I Interleaved 2 of 5
MMSI
S D2 of 5, IATA 2 of 5
X Bookland EAN, Code 39 Trioptic, Chinese 2 of 5
Programming Reference B - 3
The modifier character is the sum of the applicable option values based on Table B-3.
Table B-3
Modifier Characters
Code Type Option Value Option
Code 39 0 No check character or Full ASCII processing.
1 Reader has checked one check character.
3 Reader has checked and stripped check character.
4 Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion.
5 Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion
and checked one check character.
7 Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion
and checked and stripped check character.
Example: A Full ASCII bar code with check character W,
A+I+MI+DW
, is
transmitted as
]A7
AimId where 7 = (3+4).
Trioptic Code 39 0 No option specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: A Trioptic bar code 412356 is transmitted as
]X0
356412
Chinese 2 of 5 0 No option specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: A Chinese 2 of 5 bar code 01234567890 is transmitted as
]X0
001234567890
Code 128 0 Standard data packet, no Function code 1 in first symbol
position.
1 Function code 1 in first symbol character position.
2 Function code 1 in second symbol character position.
Example: A Code (EAN) 128 bar code with Function 1 character
FNC1
in the first
position, AIMID is transmitted as
]
C1
AIMID
I 2 of 5 0 No check digit processing.
1 Reader has validated check digit.
3 Reader has validated and stripped check digit.
Example: An I 2 of 5 bar code without check digit, 4123, is transmitted as
]I0
4123
Codabar 0 No check digit processing.
1 Reader has checked check digit.
3 Reader has stripped check digit before transmission.
Example: A Codabar bar code without check digit, 4123, is transmitted as
]F0
4123
Code 93 0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: A Code 93 bar code 012345678905 is transmitted as
]G0
012345678905
B - 4 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
MSI 0 Check digits are sent.
1 No check digit is sent.
Example: An MSI bar code 4123, with a single check digit checked, is transmitted
as
]M1
4123
D 2 of 5 0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: A D 2 of 5 bar code 4123, is transmitted as
]S0
4123
UPC/EAN 0 Standard packet in full EAN country code format, which is
13 digits for UPC-A, UPC-E, and EAN-13 (not including
supplemental data).
1 Two-digit supplement data only.
2 Five-digit supplement data only.
3 Combined data packet comprising 13 digits from a
UPC-A, UPC-E, or EAN-13 symbol and 2 or 5 digits from
a supplemental symbol.
4 EAN-8 data packet.
Example: A UPC-A bar code 012345678905 is transmitted as
]E0
0012345678905
Bookland EAN 0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: A Bookland EAN bar code 123456789X is transmitted as
]X0
123456789X
Code 11 0 Single check digit
1 Two check digits
3 Check characters validated but not transmitted.
GS1 DataBar Family No option specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
DataBar-14 and DataBar Limited transmit with an
Application Identifier “01”.Note: In GS1-128 emulation
mode, GS1 DataBar is transmitted using Code 128 rules
(i.e., ]C1).
Example: A DataBar-14 bar code 100123456788902 is transmitted as
]e
001100123456788902.
Table B-3
Modifier Characters (Continued)
Code Type Option Value Option
Appendix C Sample Bar Codes
Code 39
123ABC
C - 2 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
UPC/EAN
UPC-A, 100%
EAN-13, 100%
Code 128
0
12
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
5
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
12
3
4
0
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234
Sample Bar Codes C - 3
Interleaved 2 of 5
GS1 DataBar
12345678901231
NOTE GS1 DataBar variants must be enabled to read the bar codes below (see GS1 DataBar on page 13-48).
10293847560192837465019283746029478450366523
(GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked)
1234890hjio9900mnb
(GS1 DataBar Expanded)
08672345650916
(GS1 DataBar Limited)
C - 4 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
GS1 DataBar-14
55432198673467
(GS1 DataBar-14 Truncated)
90876523412674
(GS1 DataBar-14 Stacked)
78123465709811
(GS1 DataBar-14 Stacked Omni-Directional)
Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes
For parameters requiring specific numeric values, scan the appropriately numbered bar code(s).
0
1
2
3
D - 2 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
4
5
6
7
8
9
Numeric Bar Codes D - 3
Cancel
To correct an error or change a selection, scan the bar code below.
Cancel
D - 4 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Appendix E Alphanumeric Bar Codes
Alphanumeric Keyboard
Space
#
$
%
E - 2 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
*
+
-
.
/
!
Alphanumeric Bar Codes E - 3
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
“
&
‘
(
)
:
E - 4 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
;
<
=
>
?
@
Alphanumeric Bar Codes E - 5
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
[
\
]
^
_
`
E - 6 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
NOTE The bar codes that follow should not be confused with those on the numeric keypad.
0
1
2
3
4
5
Alphanumeric Bar Codes E - 7
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
6
7
8
9
End of Message
Cancel
E - 8 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
A
B
C
D
E
F
Alphanumeric Bar Codes E - 9
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
G
H
I
J
K
L
E - 10 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
M
N
O
P
Q
R
Alphanumeric Bar Codes E - 11
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
S
T
U
V
W
X
E - 12 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
Y
Z
a
b
c
d
Alphanumeric Bar Codes E - 13
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
e
f
g
h
i
j
E - 14 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
k
l
m
n
o
p
Alphanumeric Bar Codes E - 15
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
q
r
s
t
u
v
E - 16 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
w
x
y
z
{
|
Alphanumeric Bar Codes E - 17
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
}
~
E - 18 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Appendix F ASCII Character Sets
Table F-1
ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table
ASCII Value Full ASCII
Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke
1000 %U CTRL 2
1001 $A CTRL A
1002 $B CTRL B
1003 $C CTRL C
1004 $D CTRL D
1005 $E CTRL E
1006 $F CTRL F
1007 $G CTRL G
1008 $H CTRL H/
BACKSPACE
1
1009 $I CTRL I/
HORIZONTAL TAB
1
1010 $J CTRL J
1011 $K CTRL K
1012 $L CTRL L
1013 $M CTRL M/
ENTER
1
1014 $N CTRL N
1015 $O CTRL O
The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled.
Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.
F - 2 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
1016 $P CTRL P
1017 $Q CTRL Q
1018 $R CTRL R
1019 $S CTRL S
1020 $T CTRL T
1021 $U CTRL U
1022 $V CTRL V
1023 $W CTRL W
1024 $X CTRL X
1025 $Y CTRL Y
1026 $Z CTRL Z
1027 %A CTRL [
1028 %B CTRL \
1029 %C CTRL ]
1030 %D CTRL 6
1031 %E CTRL -
1032 Space Space
1033 /A !
1034 /B “
1035 /C #
1036 /D ?
1037 /E %
1038 /F &
1039 /G ‘
1040 /H (
1041 /I )
1042 /J *
1043 /K +
Table F-1
ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)
ASCII Value Full ASCII
Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke
The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled.
Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.
ASCII Character Sets F - 3
1044 /L ,
1045 - -
1046 . .
1047 /o /
1048 0 0
1049 1 1
1050 2 2
1051 3 3
1052 4 4
1053 5 5
1054 6 6
1055 7 7
1056 8 8
1057 9 9
1058 /Z :
1059 %F ;
1060 %G <
1061 %H =
1062 %I >
1063 %J ?
1064 %V @
1065 A A
1066 B B
1067 C C
1068 D D
1069 E E
1070 F F
1071 G G
Table F-1
ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)
ASCII Value Full ASCII
Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke
The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled.
Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.
F - 4 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
1072 H H
1073 I I
1074 J J
1075 K K
1076 L L
1077 M M
1078 N N
1079 O O
1080 P P
1081 Q Q
1082 R R
1083 S S
1084 T T
1085 U U
1086 V V
1087 W W
1088 X X
1089 Y Y
1090 Z Z
1091 %K [
1092 %L \
1093 %M ]
1094 %N ^
1095 %O _
1096 %W ‘
1097 +A a
1098 +B b
1099 +C c
Table F-1
ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)
ASCII Value Full ASCII
Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke
The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled.
Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.
ASCII Character Sets F - 5
1100 +D d
1101 +E e
1102 +F f
1103 +G g
1104 +H h
1105 +I i
1106 +J j
1107 +K k
1108 +L l
1109 +M m
1110 +N n
1111 +O o
1112 +P p
1113 +Q q
1114 +R r
1115 +S s
1116 +T t
1117 +U u
1118 +V v
1119 +W w
1120 +X x
1121 +Y y
1122 +Z z
1123 %P {
1124 %Q I
1125 %R }
1126 %S ~
Table F-1
ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)
ASCII Value Full ASCII
Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke
The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled.
Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.
F - 6 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Table F-2
ALT Key Standard Default Tables
ALT Keys Keystroke
2064 ALT 2
2065 ALT A
2066 ALT B
2067 ALT C
2068 ALT D
2069 ALT E
2070 ALT F
2071 ALT G
2072 ALT H
2073 ALT I
2074 ALT J
2075 ALT K
2076 ALT L
2077 ALT M
2078 ALT N
2079 ALT O
2080 ALT P
2081 ALT Q
2082 ALT R
2083 ALT S
2084 ALT T
2085 ALT U
2086 ALT V
2087 ALT W
2088 ALT X
2089 ALT Y
2090 ALT Z
ASCII Character Sets F - 7
Table F-3
Misc. Key Standard Default Table
Misc. Key Keystroke
3001 PA 1
3002 PA 2
3003 CMD 1
3004 CMD 2
3005 CMD 3
3006 CMD 4
3007 CMD 5
3008 CMD 6
3009 CMD 7
3010 CMD 8
3011 CMD 9
3012 CMD 10
3013 CMD 11
3014 CMD 12
3015 CMD 13
3016 CMD 14
Table F-4
GUI Shift Keys
Other Value Keystroke
3048 GUI 0
3049 GUI 1
3050 GUI 2
3051 GUI 3
3052 GUI 4
3053 GUI 5
3054 GUI 6
3055 GUI 7
3056 GUI 8
The Apple
™
iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar. Windows-based
systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key.
F - 8 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
3057 GUI 9
3065 GUI A
3066 GUI B
3067 GUI C
3068 GUI D
3069 GUI E
3070 GUI F
3071 GUI G
3072 GUI H
3073 GUI I
3074 GUI J
3075 GUI K
3076 GUI L
3077 GUI M
3078 GUI N
3079 GUI O
3080 GUI P
3081 GUI Q
3082 GUI R
3083 GUI S
3084 GUI T
3085 GUI U
3086 GUI V
3087 GUI W
3088 GUI X
3089 GUI Y
3090 GUI Z
Table F-4
GUI Shift Keys (Continued)
Other Value Keystroke
The Apple
™
iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar. Windows-based
systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key.
ASCII Character Sets F - 9
Table F-5
PF Key Standard Default Table
PF Keys Keystroke
4001 PF 1
4002 PF 2
4003 PF 3
4004 PF 4
4005 PF 5
4006 PF 6
4007 PF 7
4008 PF 8
4009 PF 9
4010 PF 10
4011 PF 11
4012 PF 12
4013 PF 13
4014 PF 14
4015 PF 15
4016 PF 16
Table F-6
F key Standard Default Table
F Keys Keystroke
5001 F 1
5002 F 2
5003 F 3
5004 F 4
5005 F 5
5006 F 6
5007 F 7
5008 F 8
5009 F 9
F - 10 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
5010 F 10
5011 F 11
5012 F 12
5013 F 13
5014 F 14
5015 F 15
5016 F 16
5017 F 17
5018 F 18
5019 F 19
5020 F 20
5021 F 21
5022 F 22
5023 F 23
5024 F 24
Table F-7
Numeric Key Standard Default Table
Numeric Keypad Keystroke
6042 *
6043 +
6044 Undefined
6045 -
6046 .
6047 /
6048 0
6049 1
6050 2
6051 3
6052 4
Table F-6
F key Standard Default Table (Continued)
F Keys Keystroke
ASCII Character Sets F - 11
6053 5
6054 6
6055 7
6056 8
6057 9
6058 Enter
6059 Num Lock
Table F-8
Extended Keypad Standard Default Table
Extended Keypad Keystroke
7001 Break
7002 Delete
7003 Pg Up
7004 End
7005 Pg Dn
7006 Pause
7007 Scroll Lock
7008 Backspace
7009 Tab
7010 Print Screen
7011 Insert
7012 Home
7013 Enter
7014 Escape
7015 Up Arrow
7016 Dn Arrow
7017 Left Arrow
7018 Right Arrow
Table F-7
Numeric Key Standard Default Table (Continued)
Numeric Keypad Keystroke
F - 12 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Glossary
A
Aperture. The opening in an optical system defined by a lens or baffle that establishes the field of view.
ASCII. American Standard Code for Information Interchange. A 7 bit-plus-parity code representing 128 letters, numerals,
punctuation marks and control characters. It is a standard data transmission code in the U.S.
Autodiscrimination. The ability of an interface controller to determine the code type of a scanned bar code. After this
determination is made, the information content is decoded.
B
Bar. The dark element in a printed bar code symbol.
Bar Code. A pattern of variable-width bars and spaces which represents numeric or alphanumeric data in machine-readable
form. The general format of a bar code symbol consists of a leading margin, start character, data or message character,
check character (if any), stop character, and trailing margin. Within this framework, each recognizable symbology uses
its own unique format. See Symbology.
Bar Code Density. The number of characters represented per unit of measurement (e.g., characters per inch).
Bar Height. The dimension of a bar measured perpendicular to the bar width.
Bar Width. Thickness of a bar measured from the edge closest to the symbol start character to the trailing edge of the same
bar.
Bit. Binary digit. One bit is the basic unit of binary information. Generally, eight consecutive bits compose one byte of data.
The pattern of 0 and 1 values within the byte determines its meaning.
Bits per Second (bps). Bits transmitted or received.
Bluetooth. A technology that provides a way to connect and exchange information between devices such as scanners,
mobile phones, laptops, PCs, and printers over a secure, globally unlicensed short-range radio frequency.
Glossary - 2 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Boot or Boot-up. The process a computer goes through when it starts. During boot-up, the computer can run
self-diagnostic tests and configure hardware and software.
bps. See Bits Per Second.
Byte. On an addressable boundary, eight adjacent binary digits (0 and 1) combined in a pattern to represent a specific
character or numeric value. Bits are numbered from the right, 0 through 7, with bit 0 the low-order bit. One byte in
memory is used to store one ASCII character.
C
CDRH. Center for Devices and Radiological Health. A federal agency responsible for regulating laser product safety. This
agency specifies various laser operation classes based on power output during operation.
CDRH Class 1. This is the lowest power CDRH laser classification. This class is considered intrinsically safe, even if all laser
output were directed into the eye's pupil. There are no special operating procedures for this class.
CDRH Class 2. No additional software mechanisms are needed to conform to this limit. Laser operation in this class poses
no danger for unintentional direct human exposure.
Character. A pattern of bars and spaces which either directly represents data or indicates a control function, such as a
number, letter, punctuation mark, or communications control contained in a message.
Character Set. Those characters available for encoding in a particular bar code symbology.
Check Digit. A digit used to verify a correct symbol decode. The scanner inserts the decoded data into an arithmetic formula
and checks that the resulting number matches the encoded check digit. Check digits are required for UPC but are
optional for other symbologies. Using check digits decreases the chance of substitution errors when a symbol is
decoded.
Codabar. A discrete self-checking code with a character set consisting of digits 0 to 9 and six additional characters: ( - $ : /
, +).
Code 128. A high density symbology which allows the controller to encode all 128 ASCII characters without adding extra
symbol elements.
Code 3 of 9 (Code 39). A versatile and widely used alphanumeric bar code symbology with a set of 43 character types,
including all uppercase letters, numerals from 0 to 9 and 7 special characters (- . / + % $ and space). The code name is
derived from the fact that 3 of 9 elements representing a character are wide, while the remaining 6 are narrow.
Code 93. An industrial symbology compatible with Code 39 but offering a full character ASCII set and a higher coding
density than Code 39.
Code Length. Number of data characters in a bar code between the start and stop characters, not including those
characters.
Cold Boot. A cold boot restarts a computer and closes all running programs.
COM Port. Communication port; ports are identified by number, e.g., COM1, COM2.
Glossary - 3
Continuous Code. A bar code or symbol in which all spaces within the symbol are parts of characters. There are no
intercharacter gaps in a continuous code. The absence of gaps allows for greater information density.
Cradle. A cradle is used for charging the terminal battery and for communicating with a host computer, and provides a
storage place for the terminal when not in use.
D
Dead Zone. An area within a scanner's field of view, in which specular reflection may prevent a successful decode.
Decode. To recognize a bar code symbology (e.g., UPC/EAN) and then analyze the content of the specific bar code
scanned.
Decode Algorithm. A decoding scheme that converts pulse widths into data representation of the letters or numbers
encoded within a bar code symbol.
Decryption. Decryption is the decoding and unscrambling of received encrypted data. Also see, Encryption and Key.
Depth of Field. The range between minimum and maximum distances at which a scanner can read a symbol with a certain
minimum element width.
Discrete Code. A bar code or symbol in which the spaces between characters (intercharacter gaps) are not part of the code.
Discrete 2 of 5. A binary bar code symbology representing each character by a group of five bars, two of which are wide.
The location of wide bars in the group determines which character is encoded; spaces are insignificant. Only numeric
characters (0 to 9) and START/STOP characters may be encoded.
E
EAN. European Article Number. This European/International version of the UPC provides its own coding format and
symbology standards. Element dimensions are specified metrically. EAN is used primarily in retail.
Element. Generic term for a bar or space.
Encoded Area. Total linear dimension occupied by all characters of a code pattern, including start/stop characters and data.
ENQ (RS-232). ENQ software handshaking is also supported for the data sent to the host.
ESD. Electro-Static Discharge
H
HID. Human Interface Device. A Bluetooth host type.
Host Computer. A computer that serves other terminals in a network, providing such services as computation, database
access, supervisory programs and network control.
Glossary - 4 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Hz. Hertz; A unit of frequency equal to one cycle per second.
I
IEC. International Electrotechnical Commission. This international agency regulates laser safety by specifying various laser
operation classes based on power output during operation.
IEC (825) Class 1. This is the lowest power IEC laser classification. Conformity is ensured through a software restriction of
120 seconds of laser operation within any 1000 second window and an automatic laser shutdown if the scanner's
oscillating mirror fails.
Intercharacter Gap. The space between two adjacent bar code characters in a discrete code.
Interleaved 2 of 5. A binary bar code symbology representing character pairs in groups of five bars and five interleaved
spaces. Interleaving provides for greater information density. The location of wide elements (bar/spaces) within each
group determines which characters are encoded. This continuous code type uses no intercharacter spaces. Only
numeric (0 to 9) and START/STOP characters may be encoded.
Interleaved Bar Code. A bar code in which characters are paired together, using bars to represent the first character and
the intervening spaces to represent the second.
Input/Output Ports. I/O ports are primarily dedicated to passing information into or out of the terminal’s memory. Series
9000 mobile computers include Serial and USB ports.
I/O Ports. interface The connection between two devices, defined by common physical characteristics, signal
characteristics, and signal meanings. Types of interfaces include RS-232 and PCMCIA.
K
Key. A key is the specific code used by the algorithm to encrypt or decrypt the data. Also see, Encryption and Decrypting.
L
LASER. Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation.The laser is an intense light source. Light from a laser is
all the same frequency, unlike the output of an incandescent bulb. Laser light is typically coherent and has a high energy
density.
Laser Diode. A gallium-arsenide semiconductor type of laser connected to a power source to generate a laser beam. This
laser type is a compact source of coherent light.
Laser Scanner. A type of bar code reader that uses a beam of laser light.
LED Indicator. A semiconductor diode (LED - Light Emitting Diode) used as an indicator, often in digital displays. The
semiconductor uses applied voltage to produce light of a certain frequency determined by the semiconductor's particular
chemical composition.
Glossary - 5
Light Emitting Diode. See LED.
M
MIL. 1 mil = 1 thousandth of an inch.
MIN. Mobile Identification Number. The unique account number associated with a cellular device. It is broadcast by the
cellular device when accessing the cellular system.
Misread (Misdecode). A condition which occurs when the data output of a reader or interface controller does not agree with
the data encoded within a bar code symbol.
MRD. Minimum reflective difference. A measurement of print contrast.
N
Nominal. The exact (or ideal) intended value for a specified parameter. Tolerances are specified as positive and negative
deviations from this value.
Nominal Size. Standard size for a bar code symbol. Most UPC/EAN codes are used over a range of magnifications (e.g.,
from 0.80 to 2.00 of nominal).
O
ODI. See Open Data-Link Interface.
Open Data-Link Interface (ODI). Novell’s driver specification for an interface between network hardware and higher-level
protocols. It supports multiple protocols on a single NIC (Network Interface Controller). It is capable of understanding
and translating any network information or request sent by any other ODI-compatible protocol into something a NetWare
client can understand and process.
Open System Authentication. Open System authentication is a null authentication algorithm.
P
PAN . Personal area network. Using Bluetooth wireless technology, PANs enable devices to communicate wirelessly.
Generally, a wireless PAN consists of a dynamic group of less than 255 devices that communicate within about a 33-foot
range. Only devices within this limited area typically participate in the network.
Parameter. A variable that can have different values assigned to it.
Percent Decode. The average probability that a single scan of a bar code would result in a successful decode. In a
well-designed bar code scanning system, that probability should approach near 100%.
Glossary - 6 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Print Contrast Signal (PCS). Measurement of the contrast (brightness difference) between the bars and spaces of a
symbol. A minimum PCS value is needed for a bar code symbol to be scannable. PCS = (RL - RD) / RL, where RL is
the reflectance factor of the background and RD the reflectance factor of the dark bars.
Programming Mode. The state in which a scanner is configured for parameter values. See Scanning Mode.
Q
Quiet Zone. A clear space, containing no dark marks, which precedes the start character of a bar code symbol and follows
the stop character.
QWERTY. A standard keyboard commonly used on North American and some European PC keyboards. “QWERTY” refers
to the arrangement of keys on the left side of the third row of keys.
R
Reflectance. Amount of light returned from an illuminated surface.
Resolution. The narrowest element dimension which is distinguished by a particular reading device or printed with a
particular device or method.
RF. Radio Frequency.
RS-232. An Electronic Industries Association (EIA) standard that defines the connector, connector pins, and signals used to
transfer data serially from one device to another.
S
Scan Area. Area intended to contain a symbol.
Scanner. An electronic device used to scan bar code symbols and produce a digitized pattern that corresponds to the bars
and spaces of the symbol. Its three main components are: 1) Light source (laser or photoelectric cell) - illuminates a bar
code,; 2) Photodetector - registers the difference in reflected light (more light reflected from spaces); 3) Signal
conditioning circuit - transforms optical detector output into a digitized bar pattern.
Scanning Mode. The scanner is energized, programmed and ready to read a bar code.
Scanning Sequence. A method of programming or configuring parameters for a bar code reading system by scanning bar
code menus.
Self-Checking Code. A symbology that uses a checking algorithm to detect encoding errors within the characters of a bar
code symbol.
Space. The lighter element of a bar code formed by the background between bars.
Specular Reflection. The mirror-like direct reflection of light from a surface, which can cause difficulty decoding a bar code.
Glossary - 7
SPP. Serial Port Profile.
Start/Stop Character. A pattern of bars and spaces that provides the scanner with start and stop reading instructions and
scanning direction. The start and stop characters are normally to the left and right margins of a horizontal code.
Substrate. A foundation material on which a substance or image is placed.
Symbol. A scannable unit that encodes data within the conventions of a certain symbology, usually including start/stop
characters, quiet zones, data characters and check characters.
Symbol Aspect Ratio. The ratio of symbol height to symbol width.
Symbol Height. The distance between the outside edges of the quiet zones of the first row and the last row.
Symbol Length. Length of symbol measured from the beginning of the quiet zone (margin) adjacent to the start character
to the end of the quiet zone (margin) adjacent to a stop character.
Symbology. The structural rules and conventions for representing data within a particular bar code type (e.g. UPC/EAN,
Code 39, PDF417, etc.).
T
Tolerance. Allowable deviation from the nominal bar or space width.
U
UPC. Universal Product Code. A relatively complex numeric symbology. Each character consists of two bars and two
spaces, each of which is any of four widths. The standard symbology for retail food packages in the United States.
V
Visible Laser Diode (VLD). A solid state device which produces visible laser light.
Glossary - 8 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Index
Numerics
123Scan configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
A
accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-1, 14-24
move cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-28
send data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24
setup fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27
alphanumeric keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-87
alternate rule sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
bar code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
bar code menu example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-43
code lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
code types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-1, 14-11
default rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
invalid rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
move cursor past a character . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27
move cursor to a character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27
move cursor to start of data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27
numeric keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-21, 14-22
pad spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-34
pad zeros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-38
rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7, 12-1, 14-1
rules hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
send alt characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-61
send control characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-43
send function key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-72
send keyboard characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-48
send keypad characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-67
send preset value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27
send value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-32
skip ahead "n" characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27
skip ahead characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-29
skip back "n" characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27
skip back characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-30
space removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-32
special commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
specific data string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
specific string
any location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
any message ok . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
at start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
rule belongs to set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23
transmit error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
turn off rule sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-85, 14-86
zero removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-32
advanced data formatting . . . . . . . .3-2, 10-7, 12-1, 14-1
actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1, 14-24
alphanumeric keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-87
alternate rule sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
bar code menu example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-43
code lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
code types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1, 14-11
default rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
numeric keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21, 14-22
pad spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-34
pad zeros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-38
rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
rules hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
send alt characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-61
send control characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-43
send function key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-72
send keyboard characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-48
send keypad characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-67
send preset value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-32
Index - 2 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
setup fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27
skip ahead characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-29
skip back characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-30
space removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-32
special commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
specific data string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
turn off rule sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-85, 14-86
zero removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-32
aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
ASCII values
keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
standard defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
assembling the stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2, 4-25, A-2
auto-reconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4, 4-14, 4-19, 4-23
B
bar code defaults
all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
radio communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
scanner emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
user preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
wand emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
bar codes
123Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
ADF list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
auto-reconnect in Bluetooth keyboard emulation (HID
slave) mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
auto-reconnect interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
batch mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17, 5-18
battery reconditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
beep after good decode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
beep on insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
beeper tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
beeper volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
bluetooth friendly name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Bluetooth technology support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
bookland ISBN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
data options
pause duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
discoverable mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
FN1 sub values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
IBM 468X/469X
convert unknown to code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
convert unkown to code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
ignore bar code configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
ignore beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
port address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Intellistand idle timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
keyboard wedge
alternate numeric keypad emulation . . . . . . . 6-8
caps lock on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
capsl ock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
country keyboard types (country codes) . . . . 6-5
host types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
ignore unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
intra-keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
laser on time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
numeric bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-3
parameter broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
prefix/suffix values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
radio output power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
reconnect attempt beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
reconnect attempt interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
RS-232
baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
beep on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
check receive errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
data bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
hardware handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10, 7-11
host serial response time-out . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
host types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
ignore unkown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
intercharacter delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Nixdorf Beep/LED options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
RTS line state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
stop bit select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
RS-232 parameters
parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
scan data transmission format . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
scan line width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
scan patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
scanner to cradle support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
set defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
symbologies
bi-directional redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-53
bookland EAN, enable/disable . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Chinese 2 of 5, enable/disable . . . . . . . . . 13-41
codabar CLSI editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-44
codabar lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-42
codabar NOTIS editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-44
codabar, enable/disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-42
code 11 check digit verification . . . . . . . . . 13-34
code 11 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32
code 11 transmit check digits . . . . . . . . . . 13-34
code 128 enable/disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
Index - 3
code 39 buffering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-27
code 39 check digit verification . . . . . . . . . 13-26
code 39 full ASCII conversion . . . . . . . . . 13-27
code 39 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25
code 39 transmit buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-29
code 39 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26
code 39, enable/disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
code 93 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30
code 93, enable/disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30
convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN . . . . . 13-49
convert UPC-E to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
discrete 2 of 5 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-39
discrete 2 of 5, enable/disable . . . . . . . . . 13-39
EAN-13/EAN-8, enable/disable . . . . . . . . . 13-6
EAN-8/JAN-8 extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
GS1 DataBar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-48
GS1-128, enable/disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
I 2 of 5 check digit verification . . . . . . . . . 13-37
I 2 of 5 convert to EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-38
I 2 of 5 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35
I 2 of 5 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-37
I 2 of 5, enable/disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35
intercharacter gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-53
ISBT 128, enable/disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
MSI check digit algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-47
MSI check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-46
MSI lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-45
MSI transmit check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-47
MSI, enable/disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-45
redundancy levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-50
security levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-52, 13-53
supplementals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
trioptic code 39, enable/disable . . . . . . . . 13-23
UCC coupon extended code . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
UPC/EAN/JAN supplemental redundancy 13-12
UPC-A preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
UPC-A transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
UPC-A/UPC-E, enable/disable . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
UPC-E preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
UPC-E transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
UPC-E1 preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
UPC-E1 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
UPC-E1, enable/disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
synapse interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
time delay to reduced power mode . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
transmit code ID character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
transmit no read message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
unpair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
USB
caps lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
convert case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
country keyboard types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
device type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
emulate keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
function key mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
keyboard FN 1 sub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
optional parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
simulated caps lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
variable PIN code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
wand emulation
code 39 full ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
convert all bar codes to code 39 . . . . . . . . . 10-7
host types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
leading margin (quiet zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
bar codes RS-232
software handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
batch mode stored data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
battery
charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
inserting/removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
reconditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
battery reconditioning bar code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
beeper definitions
pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
wireless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6, 1-12
Bluetooth disconnect event . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2, 3-3, 4-3
bluetooth keyboard emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Bluetooth security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
bullets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
C
cables
installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
character set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13, 7-18, 8-12, F-1
charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
via USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
charging LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Chinese 2 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-41
codabar bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-42
code 11 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32
code 128 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
code 39 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
code 93 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30
code identifiers
AIM code IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Symbol code IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
code types
ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
configuring scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Index - 4 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
conventions
notational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xiv
cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4, 1-5
inserting scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
supply power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
cradle parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4, 1-5
D
decode zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
default parameters
all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
radio communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
scanner emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
standard default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
user preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
wand emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
discrete 2 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-39
DTF bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-39
E
encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2, 4-27, A-2
error indications
ack/nak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
beeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
enq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
laser on time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
miscellaneous scanner options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
RS-232 transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4, 7-14
unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6, 7-17, 8-8
user preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
xon/xoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
G
GS1 DataBar bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-48
H
HID Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
HID slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
host types
IBM (port address) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
scanner emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
wand emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
I
IBM 468X/469X connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
IBM 468X/469X parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
IBM defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
information, service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
inserting battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Intellistand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6, 2-7
Intellistand idle timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8, 5-5
intercharacter gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-53
interleaved 2 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35
K
keyboard wedge connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
keyboard wedge defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
keyboard wedge parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
L
LEDbattery reconditioning definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11, 2-3
discharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
standard definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
locked pairing mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20, 4-23
low power mode . . . . . . . . . . 2-6, 2-8, 4-14, 5-2, 5-5, 5-7
M
maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3, 4-4, 4-6, 4-14, 4-19
mounting
cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
MSI bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-45
multipoint-to-point communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
N
notational conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Index - 5
NW - 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-42
O
out of range indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
P
pairing
address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
bar code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, 2-2, 4-3
bar code format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
charging cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
connection maintenance interval . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
cradle host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
lost connection to host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
master/slave setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2, 4-19
mulitpoint-to-point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
on contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
pin codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
point-to-point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
radio communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
SPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
unpair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
pairing beeper definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
parameter defaults
all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
radio communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
scanner emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
user preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
wand emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
parameters
batch mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17, 5-18
battery reconditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
beep after good decode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
beep on insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
beeper tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
beeper volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Bluetooth technology support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
FN1 sub values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
IBM 468X/469X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Intellistand idle timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
laser on time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
prefix/suffix values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
radio communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4, 4-5
auto-reconnect interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
batch mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17, 5-18
connection maintenance interval . . . . . . . . 4-23
host types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4, 4-5
pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
parameter broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
reconnect attempt beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
reconnect attempt interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
scan data transmission format . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
scan line width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
scan patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
scanner to cradle support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
set defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
synapse interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
time delay to reduced power mode . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
transmit code ID character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
transmit no read message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
unpair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
wand emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
parts
cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, 1-5
scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
PIN code
static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
pinouts
cradle signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
point-to-point communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
via USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Q
quiet zone (leading margin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
R
radio communication
Bluetooth Technology Profile support . . . . 1-6, 1-12
defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
multipoint-to-point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4, 4-5
point-to-point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
reconnect attempt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
reconnect attempt beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
range indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
rastering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 5-9
Index - 6 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
reconditioning the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
reconditioning, battery bar code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
reconnect attempt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
reconnect attempt beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
removing battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
replacing battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
RS-232 connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
RS-232 defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
RS-232 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
S
sample bar codes
code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
GS1 DataBar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
UPC/EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
scan patterns
multi-line rastering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4, 5-9
rastering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
single line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4, 5-9
scanner emulation defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
scanner parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
scanner to cradle support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
scanner(s) to cradle support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
scanning
aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6, 8-8
hand-held . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
hand-held mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
hands-free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6, 2-7
radio communications sequence example . . . . . 4-1
symbologies sequence example . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
user preferences sequence example . . . . . . . . . 5-1
scanning LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
security level bar codes
bi-directional redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-53
security levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-50, 13-52
Serial Port Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Serial Port Profile master . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4, 4-14, 4-19
Serial Port Profile slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
service information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
setup
connecting a USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
connecting an RS-232 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
connecting keyboard wedge interface . . . . . . . . 6-2
connecting to an IBM 468X/469X host . . . . . . . . 9-2
connecting using wand emulation . . . . . . .10-2, 11-2
cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
inserting scanner in cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
installing the cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
mounting cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
supplying power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
synapse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3, 4-4, 4-6
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
SPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
SPP master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4, 4-14, 4-19
SPP slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
stand
assembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
standard default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
stored data
batch mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
symbologies defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
synapse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
T
technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
U
unlocked pairing mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
unpairing
bar code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
UPC/EAN bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
bookland ISBN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
USB connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
USB defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
USB parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
user preferences bar codes
batch mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17, 5-18
beep after good decode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
beep on insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
beeper tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
beeper volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
FN1 sub values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Intellistand idle timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
laser on time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
prefix/suffix values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
scan data transmission format . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
scan line width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
scan patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
set defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
synapse interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
time delay to reduced power mode . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
transmit code ID character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
transmit no read message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
user preferences defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Index - 7
W
wand emulation connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2, 11-2
wand emulation defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
wand emulation parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Index - 8 Symbol LS4278 Product Reference Guide
Thank you for your input—We value your comments.
Tell Us What You Think...
We’d like to know what you think about this Manual. Please take a moment to fill out this questionnaire and fax this form
to: (631) 738-4618, or mail to:
Motorola, Inc.
One Motorola Plaza M/S B-10
Holtsville, NY 11742-1300
Attention: Technical Publications Manager
Advanced Data Capture Division
IMPORTANT: If you need product support, please call the appropriate customer support number provided. Unfortunately,
we cannot provide customer support at the fax number above.
Manual Title:___________________________________________
(please include revision level)
How familiar were you with this product before using this manual?
Did this manual meet your needs? If not, please explain.
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
What topics need to be added to the index, if applicable?
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
What topics do you feel need to be better discussed? Please be specific.
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
What can we do to further improve our manuals?
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
Very familiar Slightly familiar Not at all familiar
72E-69834-04 Revision A - October 2008
Motorola, Inc.
One Motorola Plaza
Holtsville, New York 11742, USA
1-800-927-9626
http://www.motorola.com/enterprisemobility
MOTOROLA and the Stylized M Logo and Symbol and the Symbol logo are registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office.
All other product or service names are the property of their respective owners.
© Motorola, Inc. 2008

Navigation menu